Transcripts
1. After Effects Course Preview: Hello and welcome to this comprehensive Adobe
After Effects course. My name is Peter. I've been working
with After Effects for more than 15 years now. And during all that time, realized many
professional projects from very easy to
extremely difficult. Of course, we were looking at the fundamentals,
the user interface, as well as the functions and tools in the theoretical
or kick-off party. But mainly this
course is all about experiencing the
incredible possibilities of After Effects by means of exciting projects and
practical examples. So we're going to animate a video to the
beat of the music. Integrates texts
into a 3D landscape. Remove objects from
existing recordings, or let them fly in space. We're also going to create our very own 3D mobile model without any additional plug-ins. And we even want to create
our very own car accident. That's it. I'm gone. The part from a hands-on with the most important
hotkeys and expressions, you are going to get
access to download the video material that I
create with my drone at, let us go through
exclusively for this course. In this way, you can
actively participate in all life examples and really
cement your knowledge. You'll be learning by doing how keying and camera
tracking works. How to use keyframes and expressions to create
even better animations. We're talking about
particle systems, masks, forked, and many, many more tips and tricks to
give you an overall picture. We're also going
to take a look at ideal workflows to
render your videos, as well as useful additional
plug-ins and extensions. The main goal of this
course is to let you finish with a general
understanding of after effects, allowing you to
find a solution for whatever individual project
you want to realize. What are you waiting for? Start your journey
to becoming an After Effects pro right now and
I'll see you in the course.
2. Download and Installation: In this video, we'll quickly
browse through all the steps necessary to install
Adobe After Effects on your PC or laptop. So the first thing we
need to do, of course, is to go to their
website, adobe.com. And then we want to
check out creativity and design and click on
View Plans and Pricing. Now here they have
different sets. For example, the photography
sets containing loud, Lightroom and Photoshop,
which will cost you $9.99 per month. Or you can choose the
Creative Cloud set. This is the ultimate
set containing all Adobe applications and even more than you can see
here on this page. For example, Media Encoder, which we'll speak about
later in this course. This will cost you $52.99. If you are a regular
user, much, much cheaper. It will be if you are
a student or teacher, then you can click on this
one and you'll see it will cost you only $20 per month. All the prices seem
to be a little bit cheaper than in Germany, but still $52.99 is
some money to pay. In this case, we want to refer only to Adobe
After Effects. So we click here for $20.99, we'll click on Buy Now. And then there are
different options. If you want to be built monthly, you will have to pay $31.49. If you want to be built monthly but subscribe for a
yearly subscription, then it will be
$20.99 per month. And you can even
be built yearly, then it will be 239
US dollars in total, which is the cheapest
options of those, those three you can see here. So we click on this yearly
built monthly and continue. Now I think there will be a little try to upsell
this one with another $30 if you want to choose
Adobe Stock as well. In this case, we
say no, thank you. And then you will enter
your email address. And afterwards
they will give you permission to download
Adobe After Effects, right from your account
to your computer to use it and subscribe to
this program before, I think, and CSS3, CS4, CS6, which I used, it was possible to buy them
for a lifetime license, but right now it's all about
subscription settings. So you will have to pay this
one yearly or even monthly if you want to be a Adobe
After Effects user. So just enter your
email address, download Adobe After
Effects in the version, you'd like to pay it
monthly or yearly. And then in the next
video we'll see and really start off inside
Adobe After Effects, because the installation
program process itself is just a very standard process
which you pass on for every software you
have ever bought. So just click on your
favorite settings there or leave
everything as it is. And then we see again
in the next video.
3. First opening and our lifesaver: activating auto save: If you have installed Adobe
After Effects and opened it up and you see something similar to what you
see now on the screen, then I can say, congratulations, you've successfully installed
Adobe After Effects and are ready to work with
this awesome program. It might be that you won't
see such a welcome message, but that doesn't
really matter because the only thing we're gonna
do with it is click away. So in the upcoming videos, what we'll be speaking
about is all you can see right here, the
user interface. Starting off with everything you see here on top like the tools. Then we go through
the possibilities of your project settings, as well as the preview area with all its buttons
here on the bottom. Then we speak about
the right side, the information you see here, the effects and
presets that can be browsed right here are
found here on top. And we have this preview area. We have the characters,
the paragraphs. But we'll speak about that
later on in different videos. Of course, we'll also talk
about our main work area, which you'll see here
on the bottom here with the arrangement
of your composition, as well as the
timeline where you can arrange the
different layers. For now, to start it all off, we will just install what
I would like to say is my personal life
saver and that is the so-called autosave function. So to find this one, you'll click for edit
and then preferences. And we want to start
off with general. Then you'll see that the
front window will open up. And I would highly
recommend you to take some time and browse through
these different settings. Probably you won't need
to make any changes. You can leave
everything as it is. But in some cases, depending on your PC
and how powerful it is, it might be useful to make
some small changes here, for example, in the
memory settings or even in media and disk cache. But this will be two individual
to speak about right now, in most of the cases, I'd say ninety-five
percent of every case. You can leave all the options
as they are already set. What we want to do now
in this video is go to auto save and enable
the autosave function. I have already done so, meaning every 20 minutes
there will be saved a copy of what I'm currently working
on in the local files. And I have decided to save
a maximum of five versions, meaning that if there
will be another autosave, then they will start
with the sixth version to override my first safe. So this means that no more than 20 minutes of my work can be lost at anytime. And I've decided save
a custom location, I would really
recommend to do so. While in earlier times, it was much more often the case that After
Effects crashed right now, since there is this
subscription mode, I feel like it's
working much safer, but still I'm a friend of
doing so and enabling here this autosave function
because it will save you or it can save you a
lot of time and stress. If you have your
versions saved every, for example, 20 minutes. So just mark this checker
and then click Okay. And now we are ready to kick this one off and
start with the top area. And that's what
we're going to deal with in the next segment.
4. User interface overview: Header area Part 1: Alright, so this is our first video talking
about the basis, the foundation inside
Adobe After Effects. And in this video, we'll
speak about the header area. Before I get to do so, let me just quickly
explain and talk about the general hierarchy
inside Adobe After Effects. So your top layer, that will be the project. Here we are currently in a new untitled, an empty project. But in general, your project
might contain one until basically infinite
amount of compositions. Any composition you will find
here in this project area. And those compositions will
contain different layers. And those layers,
they can contain the effects which you want to
use on any different layer. On top we have the project, then we have the composition. And any composition
contains layers, and those layers will
contain different effects. That, to get that
straight right at the beginning is your
general structure inside Adobe After Effects. But now let's talk
about this header area. And we start with
clicking here on file and you have the possibility
to create a new project. If we do so, we
click on File New, new project, you see nothing will happen and
that is totally right. So in this case, because we are already working in a
new empty project. So if you click on New
Empty Project, Oliver, new empty project, that's nothing to say if
nothing to override. And that's why we're just getting back to our main window, as you see here, is different. Of course, if you're working
in an existing project and you create a new project
out of this project, then of course, after
Effects will ask you to save your current file before going
to create a new project. You can also open up a
project, for example, by going and getting to
click File Open Project. Or you can use the shortcut Control O to open up
existing projects. And of course, you can save your current project by
clicking File, Save As. And if you have already taken
a location, a directory, then you can use the
shortcut Control S or click here on fire safe to say if your project as
it is right now. Another thing we need
to talk about is the possibility to import
sources like for example, videos or audio data. You can go and click
on File, Import File. Or you can use the
shortcut Control I. And you see there's
a new window opening up where you can import files. But we'll talk about that
later on when we speak about everything that's going on
in this left area here, using File Import is just one of many possibilities
to import files, but as I already said, we'll
talk about that later on. Alright, so the last thing we'll quickly
consider here under this file button are
the project settings. While I think it is
basically the same as your preferences in
99% of all the cases. You won't need to
make any changes here as they are very advanced. But for example, you could change your video rendering and effects and use
GPU acceleration. This is activated, in my case, depending on your GPU
you are currently using, this will maybe
not be activated, but if it's not
activated normally, it has done so for a reason. So you can leave everything
as it is as well. You could also change
the use of expressions or the engine you use to
create your expressions. We'll talk about expressions
later on in this course. They basically give you the option to code
inside after effects. And the standard engine
which is used as JavaScript. If you want to change that, you could use it
here or do So here. But in general, as I
already explained, you won't need to make
any changes here as well as with the audio settings
and the color settings. You can just leave
everything as it is. But if you want to do so, take your time and consider these settings and
browse through them if you want to
make any changes, of course you are free to do so. The next thing we
quickly want to talk about is this drop-down. But as we're still in
a very empty project, there's not a lot of
choices we can make here. You can, of course, check out your preferences
which are already told you. But for now that's just not
really much we can do here. So we want to give our
project a new composition, and we will do so by
clicking on composition, new composition, or using
the shortcut Control N. If you're a Windows user or
option and if you use a Mac. So let's click on
new composition and you'll see a new
window will open up. First thing we could change is the name of the composition
we want to create. And in this case I will
just name it. Welcome. And now we have a lot of settings we can
choose from here. In this case, I want to use the preset HDTV 1825
frames per second, meaning that we will create a composition in
full HD settings. So we have 1920 pixels in
width and 1080 pixels. Heat, and we will do so by
creating square pixels. Of course, you have
other choices here. But in all those
years, I've been working with After Effects. There was not a single
project where I needed to change this
one from square pixels. So I think for now we can
just leave this as it is. For the frame rate, we'll
stick to 25 frames per second, meaning that 25 pictures will make up for 1 second
of video material. But of course, depending
on your sources, are the kind of project
you want to create. It might be useful to change
the frame rate, for example, to 30 frames per second, 60 frames per second, or even 120 frames per second. In this case, for the example, I think it's okay if we stick Twenty-five frames per second. You can also change any
number individually. For example, if we want to
make changes to our width, we can click here and change
it to 2 thousand pixels. If we have this
aspect ratio locked, then it will always be
16 to nine meeting that. Any change in the width will also also have an
impact on the heat. If we unlock this one, we can change any
parameter individually. Here under the
resolution settings, we can change the resolution we want to have in our preview. This is not The finally
rendered video, but the thing we really
will see in our preview. You can also change that
afterwards at any anytime. So you might want
to change it to a quarter quality so that the
video will preview faster. But in this case, it's
just our example, our stick with full resolution. And then we have
the possibility to change the start time code. This will just be your timestamp at 0 inside the new composition. So no need to make
any changes there. We want to start at time 0. But what we want to change is the total duration
of our composition. For example, if we
know we want to create a short video
for Instagram, which will have a
length of ten seconds. We can of course, type ten
seconds duration here. But as with all the
other settings, you can change them at any
point in time afterwards, after the composition has
already been created. If you feel like you need more
time in your composition, just open up your
composition settings, change the duration afterwards and more time will be edit. So I think we are good to go. What we want to change is
get back to our HD preset. So we have a width
and heat in full HD, and we can leave
the advanced and 3D renderer tabs as they are. But we will speak about the Advanced tab later
on in this course, but for now, we just click Okay and create our
first composition. Well done, we have added our very first composition
inside of Adobe After Effects, and we'll see the
welcome composition here on the left inside
of our project data, as well as now opened up here at the bottom and ready to be
filled with different layers. We will do so in a second. But just before that, let me quickly show
you how you can make changes to an
existing composition. Therefore, just open
up composition, composition settings, or
use the shortcut Control K. And you'll see that
the very same window we've already seen
will open up again. And you can, for example, add some extra two
seconds and the duration. Click on okay. And if we
zoom out in this timeline, we see that now our composition has a
duration of 12th seconds. I'll make a quick cut
for this video here. And in the next video, we'll continue talking
about the Herat header area and we want to add
our very first layer.
5. User interface overview: Header area Part 2: So let's add our first
layer to this composition, and we will do so by
clicking on Layer new. And in this case, we
will begin with a solid, which can also be added by
using the shortcut Control Y. A new window will open up and the name will be initialized by what
the current color is. So in this case, it would
be a dark gray solid. And of course, number one, because our composition
is currently empty, this would be the very
first dark gray solid. If you will add another
dark race solid, then After Effects would
initialize it with its name, dark gray solid two. But in this case, I will change the name anyways and write background
simply because I like to have a good structure
in the project and to see the function of the
layer directly in its name. And in this case this should
be a background layer and that's why I will type
background as the name. Now we want to change the
color, click on here, and maybe make it Some
our dark blue color. And then we would have
the option to change the size of this solid. Nowadays in composition size, you could make it
a little smaller, of course, or go back to the comp size by
clicking on this button. This is what we will
be doing right now and then we hit Okay? And you'll see that
this background has been added to
our composition. You'll find it here under
our welcome composition, or there's a new folder containing all the
solids of your project. And in this case, we
have only one solid, which is the background solid. Now we want to add
a second layer and we click on Layer new. And now this is deactivated and this is because we are currently working in
the project data. You see it active here. And now After Effects
doesn't really know where to put the new solid. Of course, it's very intuitive that right now we
only have one composition, so we want to add it
to that composition. But as this composition
is not active, After Effects doesn't
really know what to do, and that's why we will
activate this composition. And now we can
click on Layer New and add a text to the
existing composition. For now, we'll
simply type welcome, and then click anywhere
here in this bottom area, or click on the Selection
tool to finish the text off. And with the selection
tool active, you can now reposition either your text or
the background layer. Just grab it. Click your left mouse
button and hold it and reposition the layer
you'd like to choose. For an hour, I will hit Control
Z to undo my last change. And this will bring
back my background solid into its original
position as we are right now, working only in 2D space, meaning we have an x value
and we have a y value. This will mean that if the welcome text area is
above our background area, then it will be visible. While we ring the background
layer to the top. Then the welcome texts, or it won't be visible
anymore simply because we're not
working in 3D space. So the text layer is not in front of the background layer, but now it's laying
on the bottom of this background area simply because we have a top-down view. And the layer that is displayed
here in position number one will be the layer
that is displayed first. And as the text is laying
behind this background layer, of course we won't be
able to see it anymore. We will bring back the
text layer right now. One more thing we
can speak about, maybe to add an effect
to this text layer. So with this welcome
layer marked, we hit effect and maybe
start off with something like Stylize and Glow. And now you see sort of a glowing effect has been
added to this welcome text. Right now I changed my view
by hitting the mouse wheel. You can do the same by clicking here and then
make it larger or smaller. Or there's another,
another option which is clicking View, zoom in or zoom out. But of course, I think the simplest option is to just use your mouse wheel
to zoom in and out. We could of course
change the radius here or other settings
in this glow effect. But for now this is
just a presentation of how to add an effect. So I think we won't need to speak about
the different settings. We will do so later on in
this course as we will use the glow effect on
some other parts. But right now, with the
glow effect marked, I will hit Delete and
get rid of that effect. Here it can change back
to your project data. And here you will find the Effect Controls right
now, of course, with the welcome
texts layer selected, there is no effect
active and neither is. So in the Effect Controls of our background,
background layer. One more thing we can speak
about is this tools bar. And I have already shown
you the selection tool, which will get
active if you click the button V and if you
click the button h, you will see that it gets
changed to the hand tool. And now you can just move
around here in this space. And you could use your
zoom tool by clicking. And now you have the chance to zoom in in different parts, but the same can be
done with this hand to just go wherever you want and then zoom in by
using the mouse wheel. There are many possibilities
to zoom in into different areas of your preview. Now, we go back to our
selection tool and we won't speak about those
camera tools here right now. Simply cost that will be
part of the course later on. And it will be much clearer if we have a direct example
to use these tools, so we'll speak about
those later on. But what we can start off
with is using Mask Tools. And here you have, for
example, the rectangle tool. If we click on this with our
background layer selected, then you will see if we draw a mask in a rectangular
shape like this, then it will be edits
to our background layer and you'll see that this
mask will be active and all the parts outside of this mark mask won't
be visible anymore. We could also, of course, draw, for example, in elliptical mask or other forms and shapes. We'll see about that later
on in the course as well. And we have the chance to create an individual mass by using
the Pen Tool, for example. If I select that and now stay with the
background layer selected, draw very simple mask. Then you'll see that this mask is edit to
our first mosque. And we could also change and switch the display of
our first mass to none. Then now we'll see that only our second mask
will be active. Here. You'll see that
there's another option to create a new text. You could do so as I've shown
you with layer new text. But you can also just click on this horizontal type tool and click anywhere here
in this preview area. And you'll see,
welcome part two. And then finished
this takes off that we've added another text
to our composition, which is now laying
below our first text, but still above our background. If we change this,
then of course, the same as before will happen. And in this case, this means that
our texts will be hidden behind the
background layer. Here we have some more
advanced tools which will also be part of
this course later on. So I think for now this is
enough for the tools bar. Here you have some more options. Considering the display
of After Effects. In this case, we are using the standard view which
can also be applied by using Window Workspace Standard. If your view of this place is somehow different
than my view, then it might be that the workspace is not
switched to standard. Might be that you are here
working in the learn view. So I think it would be
best if you'd also choose the standard views
so that we have the same setting to work on. Or maybe you can go click
on Window and check the individual marks you've set here so that we are working
with the same settings, but these are just what is selected if you click
the standard view. And for now I think
you've gotten to know the most important things
off the header area. We'll finish off this video
and in the next segment, we'll talk about a project
area you see here on the left.
6. User interface overview: Project area: Alright, so in this segment we'll talk about
everything you see here on the left in the
project area of after effects. While you already
know some things, you've seen that the
welcome composition as well as all the
other compositions, were replaced here in
this project area, as well as the solids and the layers you add
to your composition. We could start off
and right-click this project button here
and close the panel, then you'll see that the project disappears from our left side. If this accidentally
happens to you, no problem, you can bring it back
anytime by clicking on window and project. And you've got it
back here right now on the right side
of the effect controls, but simply hit your left mouse, click it and drag and drop
it to the left side again. Or you could right-click
here and undock that panel. For example, if
you're working on a lot of effects
and you still want to see the effects at the same time with
your project data, then you could undock
the project data for some time and bring
it on the right side. But for now I want to bring it back here to the
Effect Controls. And I do so by left clicking. And then after effects, It's given me some choices
where to put this. And I decided to put it here
beside the effect controls. And there we are back with
our project settings. On this left side. What we could also do hit the left mouse button
and click on columns. And you'll see we have
some checked here. And these columns are
exactly what we see here. Like for example, the name, the type, and other
settings, like for example, the frame rate, the end
point, the outpoint, and all the things you decide to mark here in
this Columns button. For example, we could decide
to unmarked here the label. Then we see that these
labeled buttons disappear. But I'd like to see
those buttons as they give a good hint on
what we are talking about. For example, the solids are, the folders are
marked in yellow, the compositions are
marked in a light brown. And here, if we
open our folder and then we see that the
solids are marked in red. What we could also do is open up our project
settings from here. Then we are back at what
we've already seen. You could make
some changes here. That's the same as
if we'd like to open File project Settings, or we already have here
these, this little rocket. If you click on that
one, it will also open up the project settings. I've already told you
that you have a lot of possibilities to import sources. The first one was clicking
on File, Import File. But the same effect happens
if you right-click in this area and click
on Import file. Or of course, you could
also just open up any folder, like for example, the car accident folder from our course resources and import the car file just by drag dropping it here inside
of our project data. Now what we can do besides of creating a new composition from scratch is we could start off directly with a source
like for example, this car dot mp4 source. So we market and now
simply drag it here to this small composition
button and leave it there. And you'll see that a new
composition is created. You see this here.
It is named the same as the MP4 source. And it also has the same data, meaning it is created in
full HD just as the source. And the length is also the same, in this case, five
seconds and one frame. Now, what we could also do
to create the same effect of imported source directly
in a new composition. And we do this by clicking File, Import File or by clicking
right here, Import File. Now we could, for example, select this beach video
and hit Import Options, create composition out of
this market, click Import, and you'll see that the beach dot mp4 will be imported and a new composition
will be created. Just the same as we did with the car after drag drop in it. Now, the next thing
we want to do is create a folder
structure here. And we could do so by
right-clicking and hitting new folder or simply click
the small folder button. For example, we want to
name this one media. And now we take our beach
dot mp4 head control car. Then drag drop this into
our media and you'll see that both of those files will be placed inside this folder. If we'd like to
rename, for example, a source or later
on maybe a layer. We can do so anytime
by marking it, hit an Enter and then writing, for example, Miami Beach. Hit Enter again to
save the new name. And you'll see that it will also be changed here in
the composition. Now, of course, we
can also delete data just by hitting either
delete or drag, drop it here into
this little bin, or just Bye clicking this
bin with the fire marked. Then you will see that if
you click Delete again, the phi will be removed
from our project sources. Now of course, later on when
you are really working in big compositions with a lot
of data, a lot of sources. Then you might want to use this search bar and
quickly find your data. Like for example,
this car dot mp4 source simply by typing car
here in the search bar. But I think that's
very intuitive to use. So no need to
further explain it. Of course, the search
bar can be fun. For example, here, considering the project data
as well as here, you can search for
effects and presets, but we'll talk about
that later on. One more thing we could maybe consider is if certain
locations and directories change locally on your PC
or laptop so that After Effects won't be able to
find your sources anymore. For example, if we go back here in this current
composition, it might be that
after Effects won't show up this little
car accident. But if the video has
changed its directory, then there will be a
very colorful image stating that after effects
cannot find your file. And you can relocate
this file by clicking the car dot mp4 source data and right-clicking replace
footage with fire. And then you will find new
location of your car accident, mark the Source, click Import. And afterwards, After Effects
will change the source data and go back to the
image you want to see. I think that's enough
for this left part. We've talked about the
most important things the effect controls we
will consider later on. They play a big part
in this course. But for now, the
most important thing was to talk about
this project area. You know how to create folders, you know how to import sources. So we are ready to
go and speak about this preview area and will
do so in the next video.
7. User interface overview: Preview area: In this video, we'll speak
about the preview area, and therefore, I'd like to, first of all, switch back to our welcome composition where
we have some more layers. And the first thing we
want to talk about is the possibility to either work in your composition
as you see here. Or if you, for example, a double-click on
this background area, you'll see that a new
drop-down will open up here. And now we're really
working only in the layer. This might be useful if
you are working in a very, very big composition
with a lot of layers, then you might want
to start changing the layer itself
given after effects. Some less work to do for now. And if you, for example, adjust this mask and right
now you're happy with it, how you produce
it in this layer. Then you can switch back to the composition and
you'll see that the adjustments will be overwritten here in this
complex composition, like you have done
so in the layer. So you can either open up the composition or work
in different layers. And if you're
working in a layer, you could also apply
some more effects. But that's what we're going
to see later when we are, for example, talking about
the Roto Brush function. So I think that's enough
to talk about for these, these top options here. What we're going to
do now is talk about the most relevant things
we see here at the bottom. While you already know that here with this percentage mark, you can change the view. The same effect applies if you're switching with
your mouse wheel. Or of course you could
go here and click view, zoom in and zoom out. Next in line are the options to show grid and other
helping elements. So we click on here
and for example, activate the tidal action safe. Then we'll see that here
there are some small marks. For example, if you want to adjust your text
right to the center, horizontally off your
composition, then of course, these two red dots here mark
the center of the text and this small line here will mark your center horizontally
in the composition. And the same of course, will apply to this slide here, which will mark the
vertical center. And here you have some other
smaller helping elements. For example, if
you want to adjust some elements on the
left and on the right, then you could just
turn on the title and action safe to have
some helping elements. You could also apply the
proportional grid if you want to give your composition
some elements of the same size and in
the same position, then you might want to use this grid and you could
also get that one. More details. If you click
on the grid check mark here. Also, you could take rulers and apply those that you have
some helping numbers here. But to be honest,
most of the time, I'm only using the tidal action safe to adjust my text elements. So that might be very useful to apply at some time
in your composition. For now, we don't
need that anymore. And the next thing we
want to talk about here is this Toggle Masks, which this will
simply turn on and off the border
lines of your mask. Like for example, if I
click here right now, of course the mask itself
will still be active. If we check it out here. Activated our first mass
for demonstration purposes, but our second mask, of
course, is still active. The only thing that has
changed is that the board has won't show anymore if
we click this button. And this might be
useful if we are working in a very big
composition with a lot of mask, a lot of layers than
sometimes those masks borders might disturb the view
so you could deactivated. But of course still the mask itself will play an active role. Next thing to talk about is this preview time
switch clicking on there you could go and jump to any given point in time
in your composition. Of course, in this
composition right now, there is no movement at all. So we might want to check this one out in
the car composition. And if I click here,
and for example, fly two or 3 second mark, click Okay, then you'll
see that of course, the marker here in time will fly to that point in time
and our composition, the preview, will also change to the point of three
seconds and nine frames. On the right side of this one, we find the option
to take a snapshot. To be honest, I have
never used this option, but I might think of
the only use case, which is if you want
to create a loop video like for example on
TikTok or an Instagram, which will always repeat itself, then you want to make sure that your first frame will be exactly the same as
your last frame. So you might want to flight
to your first frame. Click on this Take
Snapshot option. You will hear the sound,
which means that after Effects will save this
frame in its cache. And now you could go jump
to your last frame of the composition and click on this eye with your left
mouse button pressed. So the snapshot will be shown. And if you let go your
left mouse button, then you could compare
both pictures. And in this case, of
course, they are the same. So to maybe show it
a little bit better, we jump right in the middle
of this composition. If I left-click on
this right now, leave my left mouse button
pressed, then you'll see. My very first frame that I
have saved in the snapshot. Of course, it looks different than the one here in the middle. So if you might want to
create a loop video, you could check out this way if your first and last frame
are exactly the same, so that the video could be played endlessly without anyone noticing where it originally
started and ended. The next thing we
want to talk about is this resolution factor here. Right now we are working
in full resolution, meaning that our
preview will really show up in best quality. While of course, we might
want to work a little bit faster inside
our composition. So we can change this one, for example, to
quarter resolution. And this will really only influenced the
preview and doesn't have any effect on the final rendered video
there we can of course, change that one back
to full resolution. And we could also make these changes here inside
our composition settings. Either with opening the
shortcut Control K, or just click on Composition
composition Settings. And you'll find the
resolution right here. As all the settings inside
our composition settings. They might be
changed at any time. So we could go back here, click on full resolution, and it will be applied to
this menu here as well. If you're working in
a huge composition, of course, this might
be useful to switch, for example, to
quarter resolutions simply to get your
previews a lot faster. But the disadvantage, of course, is that you'll lose some detail
inside your preview area. The next thing we
want to talk about is this toggle switch
for the transparency. Therefore, I'll go back to
our welcome composition. And you'll see that
this black area originally is not created
by a really black solid, but it's originally transparent. And therefore, if I turn
on the transparency, then you'll see that it won't
be shown in black anymore, but it will be shown in
sort of a transparent mode. And this might be useful
to check out, for example, later in this course when we will create a T-shirt design. Then of course, what we want to do is we want
to write something like We love Bitcoin
or wherever we are going to create this area, we don't want to use and
create an a black solid, but of course we want to
put this on a gray t-shirt, on a black t-shirt,
on a brown T-shirt. So we want to really make sure that we have transparent areas. And what we also need to do in case we don't want this
to be rendered in black, we need to change
our color settings in the Render adjustments, but we'll check
that out later on. I think for now, it's enough to know that you can just turn on the transparency here by
clicking this small button. For now, we don't
want to talk about the camera settings right here, as they will be part
of our 3D options, which we'll talk about
later on in this course. And I think the only
necessary thing we could maybe
consider right now in this preview area is this small option here
to change the exposure. If you're working in a very dark composition
and you might want to enlighten the areas, then you could give this one a little bit more of exposure so that for example, if we're working in 3D, some layers will be hidden
behind other layers, then we want to see the
effect better exposure. So we could apply
these settings here. And that is also just an
adjustment for the preview area which won't have any effect on the finery rendered composition. But for now, I'll just go
in there and give this one, get this one back to 0. And I think you now know the most important options
here inside this preview area, so we can finish off this video. And the next thing we will talk about is this right area here. So we'll see again
in the next video.
8. User interface overview: Right side Info and Audio: Alright, let's continue
and now talk about this right area here
in After Effects. And this area might have
a very individual look depending on how you like your workflow to be
in After Effects. What I'm always doing
is click on here and activate the essential graphics. Meaning that info,
audio preview, effects and presets
align paragraph tracker, content aware, fill em, the character categories
will be shown here. But of course, you can
activate or deactivate any specific category at any point in time by coming
up and clicking Window. And for example, clicking
here on character. By first clicking it, it will show up this character category and by now click in this one again. The character category will now be hidden here from
this right side. But now I want to bring it back. Before we start to speak about all those
specific categories. You can of course also
choose a different preset. Like for example, only show the motion tracking categories. Then you will only show info, preview and tracker as well as content aware fill
here on this right side. But as I already said, I'd like to work with
the essential graphics. So those would be the
ones that we will consider in the
next few minutes. The first thing we want to talk about is that of
course, you can drag, drop your single categories and rearrange them like for
example, this info category. Simply click your
left mouse button and then you can, for example, rearrange this info box and
bring it back to the bottom, or bring it back with your left mouse button
clicked to the top. Of course, you can
also right-click and close the panel and
bring it back at any point in time with clicking
on window and coming up. Bring the info again, left mouse button clicked
and bring it back on top. But let's talk about what
the info will show for us. And in this case, on the left, you'll find the color settings. And on the right side you will find the positional settings. If I come over into my
preview area and go, for example, to the right side of my composition
with the mouse. Then of course the x value
will be very close to 1920 as this is our
composition size in x. And if I come back
here to the bottom, then it will be close in the y. Well, you 21080 as this is our
y size of the composition. And you'll see that
if get to come over, over our hour like purple layer, then we'll see that the R, G B values are now
in the red channel, 57 out of 255. In the green channel, 58 out of 255 N in the blue channel, 83 out of 255, the single-channel
colors will be edit up, meaning that if we, for example, create a new layer with red, well you 255, green value 255, and blue value to earn 55, then this layer will be white. Well, of course, for example, if we put all the
channel values to 0, then we are working
in black space. We are, for example, working in corporate design and you have one color that will always be repeated in different
compositions and different layers than your
first possibility might be. To just remember the settings we have chosen here,
like for example, red, 57, green, and blue, a T3. Or what you can also do
is come up and create a new layer, new solid. And now click this picker tool. And you could just simply
come into your preview area. Click on the purple area here, and the color will be chosen
like exactly the same. And you'll see here red, 57 again, green, and blue 83. If we now change, for example, are
blue value here, then you'll see that
the final solid will be much more bluish
and it will come up, for example, to the red channel. And we switch this one up, then of course, the solid will
get more and more reddish. I think that's clear for
this step right now. So we cancel creating
a new solid. And we have finished
talking about the information box here. And what we want to do now
is open up our audio box and there is no audio data in this composition will come
over to our car composition. And now with this one marked, you will see that I
could, for example, switch up the volume
of this audio, of this layer here. And I could even change
the single channels left and right if you'd only
like to turn up the volume, for example, of
your left channel if you are listening
with earphones or you want to create an effect like flying from the
left to the right. And you could of course,
also animate those settings, will speak about animations
and keyframes later on. But for now I think it's
enough to know that you can change the left channel as
well as the red channel. And of course, here
in the middle, you can change the single
channels both at the same time. And you can even click on here and write the
number you'd like to have for the volume of your
layer in consideration. I think that's enough
for the audio box. And the next thing
we want to talk about is the preview box.
9. User interface overview: Right side Preview: Alright, so in this
segment we'll quickly get to know the
preview category. And this category can also, of course be found here on the right side of your
After Effects workspace. And talking about the Preview, I have imported another file, another source,
in this case it's a drone shot from Mexico. And what she can do now in this preview segment is that you have
different shortcuts. And these shortcuts
can be mapped to different adjustments of how you want your preview
to be played or how you want to
hear your preview. In this case, we have
the spacebar shortcut. And this shortcut will include both our video as well as
our audio in our preview. Before talking about the range
and player from options, we quickly come down
here and see that this little bracket will be our so-called workspace
or work area. And then here on top, we have the option
with a navigator to zoom in or zoom out. For example, here
towards our work area. Now, this point in time is
our current time indicator. And yes, you will see here, the indicator right now is
outside of our work area. And if we come back
here and select the range to be previewed, is right now the work area
extended by current time. Meaning that if I use the
shortcut Space-bar right now, you will see that the preview, we'll start at this
current point in time, although the point itself is
outside of our work area. And you'll see here these
little green lines. Those are the indicators of our range that is
currently already rendered or saved
in the casual After Effects before previewing
the final video. By the way, it might be that right now I'm
lagging a little bit because I'm pushing After
Effects and my PC to its limit. Talking and recording, we're
rendering a fork, a video. So please excuse me for that, but I hope that you
will still hear me. So coming back here to this
range, as I already said, the work area extended by current time just means
that the preview, we'll start at the
current time indicator, although this one might be
outside of our work area. Now, if we come back here
to the range and simply select the work area and
we hit the spacebar again. Then you'll see that
our first frame to be previewed right now is
inside the work area. And you'll see the green line is more and more
getting built up. If the whole work area
has been pre-rendered, then after Effects will
begin to play your video, and it will begin from
your current timestamp. And the video will be played
all over again and again. So the work area will be previewed all over
again and again. And this can be changed by clicking this
little button here. Then you have the
option to change from a loop to only play
your preview area once. Now we have some more
options to select from. Of course, we could decide to not play it from
our current time, but to play it from the
beginning of our range. And here at the bottom, we can decide to play in
different frame rates as well as skip
some single frames. And this means that
for example, a hero, my original frame rate is 59
comma 94 frames per second, meaning that 1 second of video material is composed
of 59 single images. And if I change the frame
rate to be previewed to 15, this will mean that
my video preview will slow down by the
factor of about four, because right now
only 15 frames, we'll make up for 1 second of video material
in the preview, where originally we had
59 frames per seconds or 1 second will be enlarged to
four seconds in the preview. Here with the skip option, we could, for example, decide to skip two frames and only play every third frame. This means that right now
from 59 frames per second, we only would like to play every third frame
and therefore have a preview video of about
20 frames per second. And this will of course, make it a little
simpler for After Effects to render
a little faster. Here in this
resolution settings, we could leave this with auto, or we decide to go
with quarter quality. And this will of course as well, make After Effects preview
our video a little faster. So that's enough for all these different
options we have inside our preview category. Of course, there are
different shortcuts. The most important
ones are the spacebar, which is standard preview
for video as well as audio. And then we have
the numpad point, and this will only
preview our audio. Will also see about
that later on. For example, in the flyby titles are other sequences
of this course. But for now, I think we can terminate this video
of the preview category. And the next video will be
about the effects and presets.
10. User interface overview: Right side Effects, Paragraph and Character: Next in line is the effects
and presets section. And this section
will basically give the same options as we can
find them here under effects. For example, if we
have this layer selected and we could
apply any effect as we've seen with Stylize and Glow and will find the same effect
here on the right side. Stylize and Glow. And we could grab this
effect and either let go directly on top of the preview area or with
our layer selected, let go there and you'll see that the glow effect will be
applied to this layer. And we are back here
in our effect controls on the left side together
with our project settings. Now of course, we can also search for effects
here like for example, the glow effect and apply it directly after having
searched for those effects. That's basically the same as the search bar here
in the project area, and the search bar
here at the bottom. So wherever you find the
search bar, you can of course, search for effects project data, or for example,
different layers here. But now we want to get rid of this low effect
again, press Delete. And that's enough, I think for this effects and presets
here on the right. And next in line is
the line segment. Here. To explain a little better, I'll come back to our
welcome composition. And with my welcome
text selected, I could for example, arrange these texts to the
left of our composition and you'll see the effect or
arrange it to the right, arrange it horizontally
to its center. This will basically bring up the same effect as
I did before with my title and action safe and just pushing the two
red dots in the middle, horizontally in the center. And then there is of course, the same effect for
aligning vertically. Meaning we can align on top, at the bottom or in the center. Of course, we can not
only align texts layers, but for example, with our
backgrounds solid selected. Bringing it up maybe here
to the upper right corner. Then we could also click
to align vertically. And then we'll have the
same effect applied to this solid enough for the
alignment category. Next would be to talk about
the paragraph category. I think you might be familiar with those options
because they can be found in any
standard text editor. But let's quickly
browse through them. For example, with our
welcome texts layer, I want to double-click
inside this layer. Hit Enter to create a new
line and maybe right, welcome to this course. Course. And what we can do now, instead of aligning
the text to the left, we could align it to centre or maybe right align the text and you'll see that the
effects are applied. I think the other options won't need to be
explained right now. Most important thing is that
you can of course, a line, a text centered to the
left or to the right. And now let's talk about
the character category. And of course, with our
text layer selected, we could change the font-family, for example, to Times
New Roman regular. You can change the
way you want to use the font-family by selecting
different font styles, for example, the alternate
or the bold italic. Also some options you might
know from your text editor. You can change the font size. Here you can select the
leading of your texts. If you look at the
second line right now, it's selected to auto. But if we change
it, for example, to 500 pixels, then we have some more space
between the single lines. And of course, we
could also lower that space to maybe 100 pixels. Then you'll see
that there is close to no space between the first, the second, and any other line you want to
create in your text. Selecting Auto here
just means that depending on the way you
want your font size to be, this will also determine
the leading size. Then we have some
more options here. This color will determine
the color of your text. So for example, if we
switch this to read it, Okay, you will see
the textbook we read. And if we click on here, this will be your
color of the stroke. So for example, selecting
a wide stroke and enabling the stroke
to be visible by enlarging this number here. And you'll see that a
white stroke will show up beside your red fill color. Then you have the
option like now to select this stroke
over the Fill. That means that the stroke
will have first priority. If we go to the option
failover stroke, then of course, there will
be a lot more red areas. The fill color will be
the first priority. If we enlarge this pixel number, then of course the stroke
will get bigger and bigger. We have some more options here. Of course, we could make
it a little more bold as well as typing it in Italia IQ. But I think all those options, you know from your
text editor and won't need to be discussed
any further right now. As well as the tracker and the Content Aware
Fill categories here because those will play a big part in this course
later on when, for example, we want to track objects
in 3D space as well as content aware of filling and deleting objects from
existing scenes. So for now, I think we can
check mark this right area. And next thing we
want to talk about is this bottom area with the
composition settings, with the different layers, all
the options you have here, as well as a quick browse
through the timeline. While I've already explained some things concerning that
one to you, like for example, the work area, as well as
the option to zoom in and out with this top bar here. But we'll see about
that in the next video. So starting off with this left bottom area
in the next one.
11. User interface overview: Composition area Part 1: Stay strong. We are
really close to finishing this theoretical
basis part now we only need to consider the bottom area here before we really get
into practical examples, start working with texts and create our first
project example, or sort of cinematic
flyby title secrets. But for now, let's begin and start talking about this
bottom-left area here. Of course, again, we have
a search bar where we can not only search for
layers like for example, this background
layer, but we could also search for single effects, or for example, with our
welcome texts layer selected. Go for signal properties like
for example, the position. If we leave all three layers
unselected and type again, another property
than this property will open up in every layer. How to work with properties, how to select them very quickly, and stuff like that will also be part of this course later on. But for now, I just want to
quickly explain to you how you could use the search
bar to go for properties, layers, or other things you want to find in your
composition area. Now you also have
the option to adjust our current time mark by just clicking and dragging this one, for example, to the right. Then you'll see that
the current time mark will jump to this place, as well as the possibility to control click
inside this area to change from a view depending on seconds to a view
depending on frames. And you'll see that
for example here, this view has changed as well. So for example, 150
frames in this case, equals the mark of
six seconds as we are working with 25
frames per second, control-click in to bring this one back to
the second view. And what we want to talk about
now is this symbol here, which n or disables the video view of
your selected layer. So for example, if I switched
off with this layer, then you'll see
that the text will disappear from the composition. Of course, the same applies
to all different layers, like for example, the
background layer. And if you'd work with layers that include
audio material, like for example here
in our car composition, the Carnot MP4 source. Then in this symbol, we be able to turn on and
off our audio signal. So in this case, the car lot MP4 will be displayed in video, but the audio material would not be included in that composition. Coming back to our
welcome composition, the next thing we want to talk
about is this solo button. Clicking on that one
will really just solo this single layer and this
layer will be displayed. But of course, you can also
enable other solar layers so that working with a
lot of compositions and you might want to focus
on two or three layers only. There's no need to turn
off all the other layers, but you could also solo just those two or three
layers you want to consider when you are done. For example, working with
one layer and you want to make sure that
this layer won't get modified anymore
accidentally by just clicking on it without
having the purpose to do so, then you could just turn on
the lock for that layer, like for example, in this
welcome to this course layer. And now you won't
be able to click on that layer and
modify it any more. Those are the basic four
buttons you see here. Turning off the video, turning off the sound, soloing a single layer as well
as lock-in a single layer. In the next column we have a
label which is then followed up by a simple enumeration
of the single layers. The layer name, again can of
course be renamed at anytime just by hitting the enter
button and typing and new name. And this not only applies
to your composition area, but also works the
same way here for anything you'd like to
rename in the project data. Now of course, these
columns again, can be modified by right-clicking
and hitting columns. For example, de-selecting
the label of view. Then you'll see
that those labels won't be displayed anymore. Here in our composition area. Talking about the mode here, I don't want to
really go into detail right now in this course simply because we'll
talk about that. When, for example, a creating
a Bitcoin t-shirt design. By what I can show you. For example, with this
welcome part two texts. If we switch, switch the mode from a normal mode
to, for example, overlay, that you
will see that the text soul of blends
into our background. And with the mode,
we have a lot of different options to
let work together. For example, this
text with anything that's laying behind
in our composition. To give another quick example
of how you might want to use these different
modes is that we could introduce very
structured texture image and combine our texts layer with the structure
of their texture by simply putting the
texture behind this text layer and then
selecting a mode to combine the structure
of that layer with the content of our texts. But again, for that, we'll
see later on when we create, for example, our
Bitcoin t-shirt design. For now, I want to skip
talking about the Track Matte, as this will be better explained later on when we have
a direct example. The only thing we might want
to consider in this view here is speaking about the parent and linking
of different layers. And if I, for example, take my welcome to
this course layer and selecting this pick
whip tool and pick whip this layer to
the first text layer. Then what will happen is
that we now have a sort of parent-child relationship
where any change that is made to our welcome
power to layer will also directly impact our
welcome to this course layer. So the welcome part two
layers is the parent, Well, welcome to
this course layer. As a child still works
individually so you can still apply
any changes there. These changes won't affect
the welcome part two layer. While any changes made
on that layer will directly influence
the child layer. A similar relation exists, for example, between
your head and your eyes. If you move your head to
the left or the right, these positional
changes will of course, directly influence the position of your eyes while the ice itself can sort of still
individually move or blink. Now, I think enough
of this view here. If I turn on the
toggle switch mode, then you'll see that we have
some more options to talk about in this composition area. And that's what we'll
do in the next video.
12. User interface overview: Composition area Part 2: So the first thing we want
to talk about here is this little elephant
hiding behind a wall and an after effects. This is the so-called
Shy switch. And this switch does, well, that was really difficult to pronounce for me as a German. But okay, well this switch does, is, if you turn it
on, for example, in this welcome to
this course layer, then you see that
the elephant is now hiding behind the wall, but nothing has really happened. And this is because
you need to activate this Shy switch in general
for our composition settings. If we do so, then we'll see that this layer is now hidden
in our composition area. The effect of this is that
if you are, for example, working in a lot of different layers and
you're already satisfied with how you have arranged your background or how you
have arranged your music, then you could toggle
the Shy switch on for those layers
and hide them so that they won't disturb you anymore in your
composition work. Switching off this general
Shy button will of course, bring back all the
different layers inside of your composition area. Independent of whether
this little elephant here is sitting right on the wall
or hides behind the wall. But anyways, this is
sort of a way to get a better structure inside
your composition area. If you're working with a lot of different layers and you want to arrange yourself a little bit better and make it a
little more clear. Or for example, if you
are delivering a project to a client of yours and you
want to allow your client, or make it easier
for your client to only access those areas inside the composition that he should be able to modify it, then you could shut those other layers and
make them invisible. Now we want to skip this
little button here, which allows us to
collapse transformations. Simply because this will play a role in the segment
where it's all about creating our own 3D mobile
phone out of a 2D videos. So you'll see this button
in practice there. Next thing we want
to consider is this little fx button here. Right now. It is disabled as there is not a single effect applied
to any of these layers. But if we take our welcome to this course
texts for example, and again apply the glow effect. Then you will see that if I turn up this radius a little
bit to see a little better, that we could disable all
effects of this layer by simply disabling
this fx switch here. And we have another FX
switch here which allows to disable or enable
any individual effect about turning this
button here will really have an effect on all effects applied
to this layer because they are enabled if
turning on or off. This fx, which here, the next button we
want to consider is this little
motion blur switch. And if we turn this one on, for example, in our text layer, then you'll see that
it gets directly switched on as well for
our general composition. If we switch to this
one off right here, it has the same effect as
with our Shy button here. So then it doesn't matter
anymore if you have motion blur activated or deactivated
for every individual layer, if the motion effect is generally disabled,
and of course, a single layer in
our composition will have motion blur effect. But what the motion
bureau does in particular will be shown in the next segment when we create our flyby tight as a sequence. So for now, I'll just
leave this as it is. This little switch
here sort of marks our adjustment layers
inside the composition. So far in this course, we haven't really talked about adjustment layers,
but right now, I'll quickly show you what
they can do for us by creating a layer, new adjustment layer. And you'll see this
new layer here marked with the adjustment
layers symbol. And if we now apply an effect
to this empty layer here, like for example, Effect,
color correction, exposure. And now we increase
this value here. Then you'll see
that all layers of our composition have
been brightened up. And that's because every
effect we apply to our adjustment layer will have an impact on all the layers
below this adjustment layer. If we now take the
adjustment layer and put it below our text area, then you'll see that this
welcome part two texts now is no more longer
brightened up. If we bring it back
one more layer, then you'll see this text here also no longer
is brightened up. But in general, if you
want to apply an effect to all layers laying below
in the composition, then there's no need to apply this effect individually
to all layers, but you can create a new
adjustment layer and make some general adjustments
inside this layer. Last but not least, we have this little cube symbol
which enables our 3D layer. So if I generally turn off this adjustment layer for a second to make it
better visible, then we could grab
our welcome to this course text and
enable the 3D switch. And what this will do, it will give us an
additional position value. We don't only have our x
position and y position, but here in blue, you have your Z position. So we work in 3D space later on. But I can show you here
with this text marked, if you click on P, one shortcut to bring up
the position value, you see that we have
an x value of y. Well you, and now
also a zed value. To bring this one up and
away from our point of view. We could also switch this
active camera, for example, to the left to see that
changes in that area were really have an impact on where this text layer is
lying in 3D space. So that's it for all
these single symbols. Of course, here, at
the very bottom we have some different
display options. Like for example, you could
hide all these small buttons here or bring up the mode or Track Matte like
we have talked about before. And here you have some
more detailed options. Like for example, the
in and out point, the duration of
every single layer, as well as the
stretching factors. But I'd like to keep
it a little bit more simple and
maybe just toggle this switches to
have different views and leave my timeline a little bit larger to have more possibilities to
work inside there. And as already mentioned, this timeline is our last
segment of this bass part. And therefore we see
again in the next video.
13. User interface overview: Timeline: Alright, so in this last video, we'll finish our
theoretical base part of the Adobe After
Effects course. And we want to now consider everything that's going on
here on the bottom right, inside our timeline area. You already know that of course, clicking here on the
left of your work area, you can enlarge the work area to the left side of bringing it
back to its original point. And you're clicking on the
right, you can of course, adjust the bracket on the
right side of the work area. And if you click
here on the middle and lift your left mouse button, click it, then you can
change the work area total. Here on top, you have
the possibility to zoom in from the left side
and here on the right, you can, of course, zoom in from the right side of your work
area or of your composition. And what you can also do to set your work area is, for example, going here and
clicking the button B, then this will mark the
beginning of your work area. And if you want to mark the
ending of your work area, you might want to click
the button n. What we can also do is adjust our composition to the
current work area. And this will be done
by right-clicking here. And then trim comp to work area. And now you'll see we
have a new work area. And this area is now
our total composition. And if we check this out in
our composition settings, you'll see that what has been the work area right now
is the total composition. So the work area before was four seconds and 29 frames long, which is now the length
of this composition. And the starting point
of the work area before was at second one and frame 11. And this will now mark the start time code
of this composition. If I want to undo
this, IF always, the possibility to
click Control Z to undo my last step or go
to edit, undo time change. In this case. You'll see that if I enlarge
this bracket here on top, that now my composition is
back to where it has been and has a length of
about 11 seconds. Now you also have the
possibility to zoom in and zoom out with these little
mountains here on the button. Either by taking the
control and dragging it, for example, to the right side until it on the very right. We see at frame per frame or just clicking the
mountains, for example, clicking on the bigger
mountains will zoom in for one step and clicking
on the smallest mountains. Of course, we'll zoom out again. What might also be
useful is creating some timestamps
or a marker bins. You can either do so by dragging them into
your composition. For example, if you want
to mark your 4 second, then you drag this marker
towards this position. Or what you could also do
with the current time, aka being at about six
seconds and ten frames, you could just click on
here and the marker will be created at this
point in time. And you could easily
jump right there to this marker by clicking
onto this point here or by right-clicking the marker and then
saying go to marker. This might of course
be useful to remember relevant points inside
of your composition. But for now I want to
delete those markers again, and I do so by
right-clicking and either deleting this individual
marker or in this case, I want to delete all my markers. So I'll just click on here and the markers have been deleted. One last thing we'll talk
about at this point in time is the display
of each single layer. Right now we see all the layers are displayed at
this point in time. But of course, if
we take our welcome to this course text and we grab our ending point and pull it before our
current point in time. Of course, this layer will end. It's displayed before
our current point in time and therefore no
longer be displayed. What can also be done to split a layer at the current
point in time is to use the shortcut Control Shift D and width are welcome to
this course, layer selected. You'll see that at
this point in time the layout will be split. With this being said, I think we can now
really finished this theoretical part of our
Adobe After Effects course. You are ready to go with your
first practical example. You now know where to
find the basic functions, how to use the project area, import data, as well as how
to use the composition area. So in the next segments, we'll speak about texts. And at the end of
the next segment, we will create our very first cinematic flyby title sequence. So stick around
and we're going to see again in the next video.
14. Create a text: Basic and transformation options: Alright, so this segment
will be all about texts. We were learning the basic
transformation options, as well as creating our very first animations
using keyframes. At the end of this segment, we want to create a
flyby title sequence, which will look somewhere
similar to this. Alright, so let's get started. Throw everything away
we've created here and start from scratch by
creating a new project, file, new, New Project. And we want to click
New Composition. We want to name this one basic
text and leave the preset with HDTV 1025
frames per second. And a duration of ten seconds should be enough for
this one. So we hit OK. And of course we want to
start with a new text. We can either click here on the Horizontal Type Tool
or we just hit Control T, so that a new text
will be created. When we click here in
this preview area, what we want to write
maybe is just example. And I will turn on the full
resolution for this one. Won't be too difficult
to render out. And we go here into the
character settings and we increase the size of this text so that
you'll see it better. And we can position
this either by hitting and drag
drop in this one, or we can click here on Align. And for example, align it horizontally as
well as vertically. Now, we want to go through some basic character
and paragraph settings. I want to make
this one centered, which won't be visible
a lot in this case. But if we have more
than one line, we want this to be in the center and we have
our character settings. Now, for this one, I'll
choose RER and make it bold. And now we have our text
size here we have set the tracking for
this one to be at 0, which means that it
will be adjusted to our text size
in a normal way. If we want to increase this one, this will be part of our project with the flyby title sequence, you'll see that the text right now will be enlarged
to both sides. Whereas if the program would
be aligned to the left, and we would now
do the same trick again and increase the tracking. Then you'll see that the effect will only take
place to the right. Of course we want
this to be centered, so that's why I choose
Paragraph and center the text. Bring back the Align and
align this one horizontally. And now we have some
other options here. In this case, we don't even
want to use the stroke, so we're just fine with the
fill color and make it white. Later on we'll be
using a gradient to make this text
look a lot better. But for now, we're
okay with the vertex here on this black background. What we want to be
doing now is talking about the basic
transformation options. You'll find those if
we see our text layer here on the bottom left
in our composition, then we can open up the
text and transform options. If we had this arrow and open up the Transform
options by clicking this small arrow here again. Now we see options
like anchor, point, position, scale,
rotation, and opacity. And those options are not dependent or visible
only in text layers, but the basic
transformation options will be there for every layer. Meaning if you will create a new solid, you can also pose, position this solid of course, or scaling it up or down. Now, we might begin
with the anchor point. This is the little
cross you see here. And this cross determines from where to do your adjustments. What I mean by this is right now the anchor point is
here on the bottom, in the middle of this text. Now, if I scale up this text, you'll see that starting
from the anchor point, that text will scale up. Only. Going up. If I position this anchor point, move it, for example,
to the left or right, or here as you'll see, we'll position the cross right into the
center of our text. And if I scale it up again, now, you'll see that the scale really starts from our anchor point. Now we have another option
to position the text itself. And that of course,
is the position. Right now as we are
working in 2D space, we have our exposition, as well as our y position. Of course, you can always just click into those positions, type any number you like, or you will grab the text and just position it
where you want to. Now the scale I've
already talked about, we can scale this
text up or down. And we can of course, also unlock the proportions, meaning that we can
scale in x as well as y, which will, which
will look terrible. But of course, that's
possible as well. For now, I will lock those
positions together again, bring it back to 100. And I'll quickly show you
that you can also of course, a rotate the text to
the right, to the left. Here. This little 0 means that we haven't
done a circulation. But right now, if we circulated
more than 360 degrees, of course this will turn to A1. Now, you have seen every option apart from the
opacity and that of course, can bring down the opacity of the texts from 100
to 0 per cent. So right now, you know
the basic options and what we'd be talking
about next is animating those
options to create our very first moving text.
15. Create a text: Getting to know keyframes: As already announced in the
last video, in this one, we want to use our very
first keyframes to start animating and moving
this example text. Before I begin to do so, I want to bring back my
rotation to 0 degrees. And now we want to focus on
the position of x and y data. Right now you see
we are at mark 0, so 0 seconds, 0 frames. And what we want to do now is click on this little
stopwatch here, that a very first keyframe of our positional data is created in our current
point in time. If I go forward now for example, to the 1 second mark and start moving the position
to the right. Then you'll see that another
keyframe will be created. And in this preview area, we can see the direction that this text
will do over time. And if I bring back
my work area by either taken it here and bringing it to
the 1 second mark, or by clicking n at
our current point in time so that this will mark
the end of the work area. And now I click Space-bar
to see the movement. Then you can see that the
text starts to move from left to right according to
our both keyframe data. In this data here at 0 we have an x value of 966 and
a y value of 470. And this y value is
still the same here, so that there's no movement in y space while the x value
has changed to 1600, so that the texts will start
moving from left to right. So that's basically
how to use keyframes. And now what we
want to do next is start animating our text
a little differently. Starting here outside
of our preview area. Then bringing the
texts in quiet fast, slowing down here
inside this area, and disappearing quite fast again to the right
side at the end. So first of all, I want
to enlarge this maybe to two seconds for my work area. And now I want to mark both of my keyframes and hit delete so that I start
from scratch again and you see the movement
has been deleted. At the beginning. I want to take my
position at x data now, move it to the left. And this will go very slowly. You can fastness one up if you hit the Shift
key while doing so, then you'll see the movement
will be a lot faster. And this works not
only for x value, y value, but for
every where you, you want to choose, if you hit Shift that you can move a little faster
in those values. So starting from here
outside of my area, I want to again click
this stopwatch to create my very first
keyframe at our 0. Now we move forward
maybe about ten frames. You can either see this here, ten frames or here. And now I want to
bring the text In. Hit Shift again. Maybe we stop here
that we want to stay inside our composition
for maybe about 1 second. Here should be fine. And I want to move a
little bit to the right. Maybe here and now, another ten frames forward. We want to leave our preview area and move
right outside to the right. Now if I play this one out, you'll see our text flies and pretty fast,
then slows down. And at the end flies
out very fast again. Now it might be
that in your case, the text does a little
bounce-back effect right here. Because After Effects wants
to interpret this one as kind of an intelligent fly in. And if it flies and very fast and then
suddenly slows down, then it might be that
after Effects prefers to interpret this one as a
little bounced back before, then moving to the right again. And this might be because if
we right-click, for example, this keyframe, check out
the keyframe interpolation. Then here, this
spatial interpolation might be auto best year
or it might be linear. In this case here it's
auto bezier and still moves from left to right
without a bounce-back effect. But I want to show you
the difference between auto bezier and linear
in another example, which might cause differences. And therefore, I will delete
all those keyframes again. And now we want to create a triangular move from the bottom-left to the top,
to the bottom right. We start maybe
without text here. Hit on the stopwatch, go to the 1 second mark. Bring our texts right
to the top center. And then moving to
the bottom right. And what you'll see now
from the movement of this text is that after effects starts to create an intelligent way of
directional movement. So this is not quite linear, but here sort of
a parabolic move. And this is because the auto bezier
interpolation is used. And of course this
is differently. If I click on this
keyframe here. Keyframe interpolation, spatial interpolation,
and choose linear. And if I add okay, Now, then what you'll
see is, right now, the movement will be exactly linear as we did
with our keyframes. So this might cause some differences depending
on what is your setting. The standard setting
for this one is to use auto bezier
interpolation, which is in most of the cases, the more intelligent choice. So for now we want to
stick with this one, but if there is a
little bounce back, then it might be because
you have also chosen to auto bezier are some other
methods of interpolation. So just for explanation, in this case, right now, I'll hit Control Z to undo
what I showed you last. And we want to bring back our
texts movement like this. Flying in, slowing down
and then flying out. So that's it for the start of learning how to
use key frames. And in the next video, we'll start adding
some more keyframes to other properties of our text. And what we also want to
add in the next video is a motion blur effect
to make this movement look a little better
and therefore, see you again in the next video.
16. Create a text: More keyframes and motion blur: In this short video, we want to add three more
things to our example text. First of all, I'd
like to animate another property here of
our transform options. Secondly, I'd like to also animate a character
option of our texts. And lastly, I would like to
add motion blur to our text. So starting off with another
property to be animated. And what we'd like to do is
we want to fit this text in, in the moment it flies
in from the left. And we want to let
it fade out in the moment the text
disappears to the right. So the right property of
course, is the opacity. And we hit the stopwatch, make it a 100 per
cent at this moment. Bring it back to the start. Make it 0, and get here
to the third keyframe. And now we want to
make this also a 100% like in the last keyframe. And for that we
have two options. We either quickly change this to a T or something to
create the keyframe, bring it back to a 100 and
we got another keyframe. Or if I delete this
keyframe again, we could also just click
here on the left to add another keyframe
with the same amount as the key-frame before. And then we wanted
to come to the end and bring this down to 0 again. And let's check out the
animation right now. Takes us coming in, fading in and flowing out
and fading out. Maybe we change this
and bring it back a little more insight so
that the texts will fly in before and then will be completely visible. Alright? By the way, you could
also at anytime, just see the properties
with keyframes. If you hit this text layer
and hit the shortcut U, this will mean that
only those properties, properties with
keyframes will be shown you to show the keyframes. And by the way,
you could also hit K to jump to the
next relevant frame. In this case, the next
frame with keyframes. Or you could hit the shortcut E J to go back to your
last relevant frame. So this is nice for your
navigation to make it a little easier to
adjust your keyframes. Now what we also want to add is another animation of one of our character properties
we see here on the right. For example, let's say we
want to animate our tracking. So here we have no stopwatches, but what we can do is
open up our text layer, open the text options, and click on animate, and now choose tracking. And you'll see that some
options will pop up. And if we hit the stopwatch
here on our tracking amount, and to make it a little
more visible again, we hit our text layer, click you only open up those
properties with keyframes. Then we'll see
keyframes have been set and the trekking
amount here is 0. And now we want to enlarge this trekking in the moment the text is visible
here in the mid area. So maybe we start
at 0 at this point, navigate to this
point and make it, for example, let's say 50. Now, what we've done is when
the texts has flown in, it will also enlarge it's
tracking and then fly out and fade out
at the same time. Now one more last thing
we want to add in this short video is we want
to bring in motion blur. Right now you see the text
is flight and quiet fast, but still it's sharp
the whole time. And the same effect
here at the end, flying out quite fast, but still sharp at any time. So the solution is simple. We just hit this little motion bureau button
for our texts. Makes sure that the
motion blur effect is enabled for the
whole composition. And what will happen is you can see here when the Texas flight and it gets unsharp because
it's moving quite fast. So in this video, we've added three things. First of all, we've
animated the opacity. Secondly, we've also animated one of our character properties. And thirdly, we've added motion
blur to our text effect. Let's render this out
and see what we've done looking quite good so far. And in the next video, we want to also add
effects to our text. And therefore see you
again in the next one.
17. Apply effects to the text and use the mask to create a simple background: In this lecture, we want to add two effects to our text layer. And also we want to add a little color into
our background. So with our texts
layer selected, we start off with effects,
generate gradient ramp. Now, what will happen is we have our start color
and an end color. In this case, it's
black and white. And we have starting and
end positions of the ramp. So here you can see this
is our start position where the color black
has its origin. And this is the position
where the color white has its origin. And this moment ramp
shape is a linear ramp, so it will blend from the
bottom wide to the top black. If I bring this point
into the middle, then you can see that more and more of our texts layer will be black or at least
in a darker color. Also, if we switch this from
linear ramp to radial ramp, and for example, I take this
black color into our middle. Then you can see that right now, the black origin here is in
the middle of our texts. Well, this wide area right now is here at the sides
of this circle. So if I move this one out, then the white will disappear. And if I bring this One more
and more into the middle, and you can see that it
starts to get a lot brighter. So what I want to do
now is first of all, I want to swap the
colors that are brighter areas will be in
the middle of this text. And then I'll choose
the end color. Click on it and make it
maybe a darker blue click. Okay, and now I want
to bring the end color more and more out so that the text itself will
be a little brighter. That looks like a
nice little gradient we have added to our text. Now we want to do the same or at least also add a gradient
to our background. So therefore, I will
create two more layers. Layer, new solid. We'll name this one
background, one. In the size of our composition. The color will make it. Also. Let's choose the
same color as here, the end color of our gradients. So therefore, choose
this picker tool, click inside this
blue area. Hit Okay. And now we could either
create another solid or we just hit Control D with
the solid selected. And then we have duplication
of our first background. Hit Enter, name this
one background too, and open the solid settings
and make it black. Of course, the texts
layer should be on top. Then we have our background
one and our background too. And what we want to do
now is sort of blend this background one into
our background too. And we'll do so by clicking on this mask tool here or by using the shortcut queue
to make it active. And if we had Q again, you'll see that
it will switch to a rounded rectangle
tool hit Q again, it will be an elliptical mask. And in this way we can navigate through a lot of
different shapes to use. And for now, we
want to stick with the elliptical tool and with
our back 11 layer selected, start here in this
upper left corner, hit the left mouse
button and let go here on the bottom right. And in this way, we've added our mask
one to this background. So what you see
here at the sites, of course, is the
background to Layer. And now we want to sort
of blend this background one a little smoother into
our background to layer. And therefore will open up the mask options by
hitting this little error. And maybe we start with
the mask expansion. Now, if we make this
a positive value, this will enlarge our mask. And if we make this
a negative value, of course this will
shrink our mask. So for now we want to
shrink this a little, maybe sort of like this, and then bring the mask feather up so that it will look
a lot smoother and blend our background one into
our background to this is one way of how to create a gradient for the
background shape. But of course, as always
an After Effects, There's a lot of ways
to get to your target. And we could have done the very same that we've done
with our texts layer, meaning that no need to
create two background layers, but with only one
background layer, we choose Effect, Generate
and add a gradient. Choose the start codon,
maybe again, a dark blue. The end color will be black. And we make the ramp
shape radial and bring the starting points here
right to the middle. And then maybe bring the endpoint a little
more to the outside. Some this way. Of course, we will also add a
gradient to our background. I bought, I wanted to show
you with the two layers, was how to start using masks. And of course, mask
will also play a role later on in this course. So I think we've got all
the tools ready to go to create our very
first project example. This would be the
flyby title sequence, and we will do so
in the next video, and of course, also
add a sound effect to go along with this flying
effect of the text. So see you again
in the next video.
18. Practical example: Create a Fly-By title sequence: So at the end of this section
where it's all about texts, we want to realize our
first project example, which will be the
flyby title sequence. Just as a quick reminder, this is what we're going
to create together. By the way, it might be that on the first preview the
audio is a little offset, but that's just a little
trouble inside of After Effects and won't affect
or finally rendered video. Because of course, we have
made sure that the audio is perfectly suited to
offline texts effect. So for now, I'd like to invite you to maybe
stop this video in a second and try to create this flyby title
sequence by yourself. Because to be honest, you've already learned
everything that's necessary to create this effect. You know how to put
effect on the text layer. You know how to create
this gradient background. And you also know how
to use keyframes to, for example, animate
the position data. Maybe as a little
hint in advance, these texts layers you
see here 3D layers, meaning that apart from
the x and the y values. If I, for example, choose
this now text layer and hit P to open
the positional data. You see that there's
also that value. And this value will make sure that we can fly sort of like towards our view and more
and more away from our view. So what I've animated here is the zed value as
well as the opacity. And then the second text in and the third text theaters Solve is just like a
replication of the first text. So make sure that your
first text is perfect. Sync it with the audio source that you'll find in
the course materials. And then you can just reproduce, reproduce those texts and
reposition them here in time. And you're ready with this
fly by title sequence. So you either stop this video and we will
see again later on, or we just continued together and open up a new empty project. So file new, new project. And we start of course, with a new composition. Name it flyby titles. Choose HDTV, 1025
frames per second, ten seconds, just as
before and we click, Okay. And maybe this time we'll
start with a background. So Layer, New Solid, name it BG. And the color doesn't
really matter because what we're
going to do is Effect, Generate and add a
gradient just as before. So I'll quickly do that, make it dark blue here. Swap the colors. That's a little too light. Okay, make it radial
and bring the blue to the middle and then move the black area a little
more to the outside, just like this should be okay. Next in line, of course, we want to add a text. So what we're going to write
is now make it a lot larger, like for example, 350. And we want to do it bold. Maybe even larger. Or let's check out
with the largest word. Theaters and align this one horizontally as
well as vertically. Okay, so make it
a little smaller. Choose the paragraph,
make it centered. And 320 should be okay, and we align it
back to the center. Now, bring it back to now. As that's the texts that
we're going to start with. And what we're going
to add is just as with our background and
other radiant gradient. So we click on Generate gradient and
again make it radial. Swap the colors, make this
one dark blue as well. And bring the white area
to the middle of our text. And I'll take the origin of this end color and move
it a little more to the outside so
that the text will get a brighter.
Maybe one more time. We want to check with
the longest word, which will be
theaters to see you. It's a little dark
here on the outside. And then take the gradient, move the end color even
more away from the center. And like this, it
should be fine. What we could do is
maybe also change the start color to a
little light blue. Maybe like this. And now we can really
finally get back to our texts, which will. In the first place B now, and we want to add
another effect, which will be Effect
Stylize glow. So let's first of all
increase the radius. Sort of like this may be. Then decrease the intensity
to about maybe 0.5. And let's play around
with the threshold. And I think like this, it looks quite nice. So we are ready with the
effects of this text. Let's see, before and
after we can turn on and off this fx switch, this was all takes before. Then we added the ramp, the gradient, and then finally
we added our glow effect. What we want to do
now, of course, is to animate this flying in and out of our tech sequence. So therefore we need
the positional data as well as the opacity
in the first place. We want to turn on the 3D switch so that we have an additional
positional data, which will be the z axis. And we want to open up our positional as well
as our opacity data. We could either click this button and then open
the Transform options. And we have the position
and the opacity here. Or we can just use
the shortcut P to open the position and then T to open the opacity
or hit P for position, and then Shift T to add the opacity to our
visible options here. Now we want to start off by
bringing this z value to the negative so far that
this text will come as close to us and leave the
visible composition area. Therefore, we just hit our left mouse button
and move it to the left. And this will cause a
very slow movement. But if we hit the Shift
button while doing so, it will go much, much faster. So use the Shift button and
we'll see at this moment, the texts has left
the visible area. So about 2660 should be fine
for this positional data. Now we activate our stopwatch. Maybe move forward about, let's say eight frames. Bring it to about 0. Then we want to stay there for, let's say 2.5th to second. Bring it a little bit
farther away from our view. Maybe to about, let's say 450. And then another
eight frames later. This should disappear
quite fast. So with the Shift
button pressed again, we want this to move very
far away from our view to maybe about 7,500
should be fine like this. And of course, we also want
to add a change in opacity so that the text finally disappears when moving
away from our view. Therefore, we can go
to this moment about here and activate the stopwatch, meaning that all the moments
before this keyframe, it will be 100% opacity. And then when it starts to
move away from our view, we want this to decrease to 0. So if I let our work area end in this moment by
hitting the shortcut N. And now play this out. This is what we created so far. And what do you see now
is what I've mentioned before when speaking about
the First Tee frames. And we see this little
bounce-back effect. And this is caused by the
Bezier interpolation. Now, I think it doesn't
even look quite bad, but still we want
this to move linear. So therefore, I choose
this keyframe here, right-click Keyframe
Interpolation, and choose the spatial
interpolation to be linear. It okay? And the same effect could
occur in this keyframe. So we hit right again, keyframe interpolation and the spatial interpolation
should be linear. Hit, Okay, play this one again. We see that now this
bounce-back effect has disappeared,
or text arrives, flies in, slows down a little bit and then finally
moves out quite fast. But remember, as you see here, this is not played in real time as it is just
15 frames per seconds. So the final animation
will move a little faster. Nonetheless, what we want to add next is of
course, our sound. Therefore, I'll go to
the project data here, bring up my folder with the course materials
and just drag and drop this swoosh audio
source into our project and bring it into our composition maybe
right below our text. Now, we open up the arrows here, see the audio data, and bring up the waveform
here in this moment, this should be where
our texts will fly in. So let's see where
this moment is. I think probably in this frame. So let's bring back our view and move this maybe one
frame to the right. Now let's hit the
spacebar again. Because remember, the
shortcut spacebar will include the video as
well as audio preview. So let's see what
we've created so far. Alright, so I think
that fits quite well. And now what we want to
do, taking this text, which will disappear at
about this moment here. We want to let this
layer and there, and therefore just grab it here and move it to this moment. And let the text
layer and about where the keyframe Briggs this one to 0 opacity or a little later. Now, all we need
to do is just take this text layer together with
the sync audio material. Mark both layers by hitting Control and clicking
on those layers. And then hitting Control D
to duplicate those layers. Move them to the top. Double-click on this now to
texts layer and right in. And then we want to open up our key framed properties
by hitting you. And we want to also mark the second audio
material and now take the first keyframes of our second text to
be just about at the same moment with the keyframe of the ending
area in the first text. Zoom out a little bit. Make or work area
a little larger. Do this one more time. So take the second layer, duplicate them again,
bring them to the top. Double-click on the new
texts and read theaters. One are too much. Okay? And then again, hit you with our texts layer to bring
up the keyframes and move this together with the
sound at about this moment. And then we want a work
area to end about here. And let's preview what
we've created for this project as being our very first project example, I feel like this is
looking quite good. You could ofcourse at other
properties in your animation, like for example, the tracking
like we've done before. Or maybe play around
with the text size. So you are of
course, free to play around and improve this
animation even further. But for now, I think we can terminate this
section about texts. And what we want to
do next is render this animation and save a local
file on our PC or laptop. When doing so,
let's quickly speak about the best render
settings in general, different workflows to render out your animations and videos. And also we want to
quickly consider different file types that you can import into
After Effects. So the next section
will be about import and export
in After Effects.
19. Export video sequence via After Effects: AVI container format: In this and the
upcoming few videos, we'll learn a little
bit more about import and export settings
of after effects. Therefore, will stop
just for a little while creating new projects
and compositions. But what we want to
consider now is how to render such a
project or composition. I think that's a good point
in time because we've just finished creating our very
first project example. And now we would like to
locally save this file to our hard drive to
add this project, this composition
to render queue, we have different options. The easiest one is
to open composition, add to render queue, or to hit the
shortcut Control M. But you could also go to File Export and click
Add to Render Queue. Either way, a new
tab will open and this flyby titles composition has been added to
our Render Queue. So here we basically have three different
options to consider. First of all, the
Render Settings, then the output module, and the easiest one, output two. If I click here on output two, this will be just our location where we want our
video to be saved. So you can just decide for any location hit by hand
or safe and English. And when we then finally
click on Render, this will be the
location where you can find your rendered video. But now let's focus on the Output Module and
the Render Settings. Maybe we start with
the output module, which is now set to lossless. This means that the format
to be chosen is AVI. And AVI stands for
audio, video interleave, and is sort of a
container format developed by Microsoft
in the 1890s. This format has some advantages, but also some disadvantages. The biggest disadvantages of a video to be rendered in AVI definitely is that the file
will get extremely huge. On the other hand, this format ensures that are
finally rendered. Video, if not
individually downsized, will have a good or as After
Effects as lossless quality. Nonetheless, we will consider
other formats later on in the next videos so that finally we find a solution
which serves both. So it has a low file size while still remaining with
good or great quality. But now, let's consider
these upcoming options. And of course, we want to include our video in
the render to fire. So we leave this checked
and for the channels, we can stick with RGB. Although later on
when we, for example, create a T-shirt design, we will also add
the alpha channel. And for the teacher design, this will ensure
that we can print this t-shirt on
different colors. And we don't want to include
our black background. Well here we can just
leave this for RGB. Acid is already set. And the same applies for the
depth and color settings, which can also be
left as pre-selected. Now in this next segment, we have the option
to resize our video. But normally and in our case
as well, we have of course, actively decided to create
the composition in full HD. So we don't want to resize
this video afterwards. Before rendering it. Neither we want to
crop our video and the output audio settings
can also be left as pre-selected. We hit Okay. And now it will
switch to custom AVI. Although we didn't really
change anything here, quality should
still be lossless. Now, let's continue with
the Render Settings. Now here again, we have a lot of different options
to choose from. First of all, the quality we
want this to be set to best. Of course, this will result
in a bigger file size, but we don't want our video
to be saved as a draft. So we really want to use the best quality settings
possible for the resolution. We want this to stay with full. And this is also the
standard settings independent of what you've
chosen for your preview area. So no matter if the
preview will be rendered in half or
even less resolution, the standard solution to render your final video locally on your hard drive will
always be full. And that's also what
we want to choose. And leaf here. Now here we have
some other options. For example, we could switch off all effects that we've made
inside the composition area. Or we could decide on
different displays on how to use the layers we've turned
on for the solo switch. But normally if I have decided
to solo different layers inside a composition than this means that I also wanted
to be rendered like that. So no special
treatment necessary, although you could
decide to, for example, turn all those
solo switches off. Now for the effects, you could decide to turn them all off for
the rendered video. And this will mean
that all effects applied to all layers
will be turned off. Which might in some
cases be useful. For example, if you have one video file where you have an effect applied
to the whole video file. And the whole composition
consists only of this one layer where
the effect is applied. Then you might want to consider rendering the video
without effect in advance and then importing this video and applying
the effect again. But in our case,
as we have applied effects to different layers
inside the composition, it would be impossible to
recreate what we've done here. If I now decide to turn off all effects and then
import this video, then as I already said, it's impossible to create what we've done because
the effect would either be applied to
the whole random video or left out in total. So an almost any
case you don't need to make any changes here. And the same applies for the time sampling as
well as the frame rate. We have created our composition
in 25 frames per second. And we want to stick
with those 25 frames per second so we can hit Okay here. And now we have considered the render settings as
well as the output module. We've decided for a location where we want our
file to be saved. And if I click on Render, you'll see that
After Effects will begin to render our video, which consists of
88 frames and has a length of three
seconds and 12th frames. And currently 59 frames
have already been rendered. And the total time will
be about one minute. And if this process is done, we'll hear this sound. And if I want to show you
the file, then indeed, you can see that the file
format here is dot AVI. And this file is huge, although only three
seconds long and has a fire size of 522 megabyte, which will of course then be difficult to be
uploaded anywhere. For example, in the
Internet center, friends over every you want to do with your rendered project. So in the next video, we'll consider another
container format that's possible to render out
directly from After Effects, which will at least lower
Alpha size a little bit before then
leaving after effects. And speaking about
a software from Adobe that will allow
us to render in many, many more different formats. And then finally,
finding a solution with a very low file size while still sticking
with good quality. So see you in the next video
for the upcoming part.
20. Export video sequence via After Effects: MOV container format: In the previous video, we've gotten to know the
render format dot AVI. And now we want to consider
another format that's possible to directly
render from After Effects. So here we have our
sequence again. Of course, with the work
area cut to the part we want to finally render
out as a video. And now we choose Composition, add to Render Queue again. And we want to change
the output module. By the way, the render settings, that is an independent option
from the Output Module, meaning that no matter if you
choose dot AVI or dot MOV, if you want to keep
the render settings for the best settings, this would mean that
we will, of course, render our video in
full resolution. We will keep the effects. We will of course, also solo those layers selected. And basically anything
we just choose here for the dot AVI file will stay if we change
the output module. And that's what we want to do. So we click on this
and for the format, we change dot AVI and
want to choose QuickTime. If you're an Apple user, you might know the dot MOV
file which will be rendered. Now. That is sort of the
complimentary file to the dot AVI file
from Microsoft. This is more or less the EPA solution and
we click on, Okay. And what you can also do is
if you hit this little plus, you can keep the render
settings for Best Settings and maybe choose different
output modules to render audio file, for example, in QuickTime as well as in dot AVI
as I've chosen. Now, here we have again
our output directories, one time with a dot MOV file. And the second file
is the dot AVI file. And now click on Render again. And I think I will skip this
part for you and we'll see again when the rendering
process has been finished. So it should be finished
in a few seconds. There we are. And if I
open our folder again, you'll see we now
have two more files. One is just a copy of a flyby
title sequence dot AVI, again with more than
half of a gigabyte. And the dot MOV file
with the same length, of course, only has 74 megabyte. Still a lot for a 3
second long video, but a lot less than
the dot AVI file and the quality will be just the
same as the dot AVI file. So if you'd like to render out directly from After Effects, I would give you the advice to render
this one in a dot MOV. But in the next video, we'll check out another solution which is even way better. And you can export
your composition, your project to another
software from Adobe and render your video in other
formats there as well. So what we're going to do there will be explained
in the next video.
21. Adobe Media Encoder and best export settings: In the last two videos, you have learned about
two video formats that can be rendered directly
from After Effects, dot AVI as well as dot MOV. And in this video, we
want to take a look at another solution and
other software from Adobe that allows you to import project data
from After Effects, but also from other programs
such as Adobe Premiere Pro. Now, the great advantage
of this program, which is called the
Adobe Media Encoder, is that it comfortably
placed along with, for example, After
Effects or Premiere Pro. You can build up
your random list, go to sleep and let
this external program render out your files, for example, at night. Also, you can render in a lot
of different video formats, such as, for example,
the dot mp4. But we will take a look at that closer in detail in a second. The disadvantage on the other
side of the Media Encoder is that it cannot be bought
as a stand-alone software, such as, for example, Photoshop, After Effects, and all those
other programs you see here. You need to be owner of the Creative Cloud
in order to have access to the media encoder. And the Media Encoder will be included in this Creative Cloud, all epically, all
applications package only. Now what you can do is decide to take a trial of
this Media Encoder. But if you really want to
be a frequent user and run reality of projects
with this encoder, then you need to be owner of the Creative Cloud all
applications package. I can only recommend doing so, especially if you want to use other software from a DO RE such as Photoshop
or Premier Pro. Then of course, the Creative Cloud all applications package is your best solution. As the installation of this Media Encoder is
quite self-explanatory. We'll now go back to
After Effects and see what this Media
Encoder can do for us. So I'll open up
After Effects again. I'm back here in my
flyby title sequence. What I want to do now, instead of choosing composition
add to render queue, I want to add this one to
Adobe Media Encoder Queue. Now, this might
take some seconds and then the software
should open up. Now here we are inside
the Adobe Media Encoder. And what you'll see is that our composition flyby
titles has been added directly from Adobe
After Effects to the rendering q of
the Media Encoder. And currently the
output file will be a dot mp4 file and the format
will be H dot two C64. Before going into
detail considering these different formats
and output files, let's just leave these
settings as they are set. Click on this green arrow
to render out our video and we will see again when
this one is finished. Now here we are again in our directory and
as you can see, we've added another file, which is the MP4 file, read nuts directly from
the Adobe Media Encoder. Now, this new file only has a
fire size of 1.09 megabyte, which is a whole lot less
than the dot AVI file, but also a lot less
than the dot MOV file. We've ran out before it
directly from After Effects. In terms of quality, however, this still looks very good as I can show you by
playing this video. Now, going back to
our Media Encoder, I've already said
that the format is the H dot two C64 format. And this normally is based
on the codec x to six. For this codec basically ensures that both is
true on the one side, the fire size still
stays very small. On the other side, a maximum of quality still is kept
inside of our video. Now, it is also set that
YouTube deals best with this H dot H.264 format before
doing their own conversion. But what I've done is I've uploaded all three files that
we've currently rendered, the MOV file, the AVI file, as well as the MP4 file, and play them out in full HD. And what I can say in
terms of visible quality, they all look the same. The main basic
difference, of course, was that for the AVI file, we were uploading half a
gigabyte for the MP4 file. This was done in
five or ten seconds. So the visible quality looks the same for all three uploads. But still, my advice for
you would be to render out in MP4 with the H
dot H.264 format. If possible, if you are using
the Adobe Media Encoder. And if not, don't worry
in the next video, we will speak about
another option to use so that you can use
your rendered files from After Effects to convert them in other formats and safe
a lot of file size. Nonetheless, back in
our media encoder, let's now talk about
some options you can choose inside this software. Now, first of all,
the media encoder can not only be used to import projects directly
from other Adobe software, such as Adobe After Effects. But what we could also
do is decide to use the media and color
essay converting tool. This means that, for example, I could take my dot AVI file, which we've recently ran out. Directly in After Effects
and drag and drop this video file into our data
here in the Media Encoder. And what we could do is
create the same MP4 file directly from this video
file as we've done before with importing our
project in After Effects. Also, of course,
we have a lot of different formats
to choose from. If we check out
this preset brother here on the bottom left, we could type H dot H.264. And we see that just for
this very special format, we have a lot of different
options to choose from. Like for example, the 720 P
preset or the full HD preset. We could decide to specialize
here on different devices, such as the mobile device. And of course, there are tons
of different other formats. Not only the H264,
but all in all, there are a lot of
different options and many, many more options than our possibilities are
in After Effects. Now, what I'd like
to show you as well as the
watchfulness options. Just maybe we create a small example if I
hit this plus button. And here I have created
an auteur render file folder on my laptop. And if I choose this folder
and pick this folder, what this will do is anytime a new file will be
added to this folder, that could be a video
file or an After Effects, after Effects project file. For example. Anytime
a new file is added to this folder,
these settings here, right now the H.264
setting is used to convert this fire directly when the new file is added
to this folder. If you decide to watch this
folder and for example, save your projects or your videos to be
converted in that folder. Then this tool,
the media encoder, can be used to create
these files automatically. Now lastly, I'd like to show
you that you can of course, also individually change your format settings
and you do so by right-clicking here
on this format and hitting the export settings, this will open another window, and there it is. And on the left side, of course, we have our preview from
the imported project. And here on the right side, we have some other options to
choose from or to even add. For example, effects after having imported
the project file. Normally to be honest, I have never edit and effect afterwards
because of course, our project is finished when importing this
from After Effects. But if you want to do so, you could, for example, even add lumetri look after importing your project
or a video files. Now you could also change
the basic video settings, like for example, the
width or the heat. You could even change
the frame rate or do changes in
the audio settings. And what I think is very interesting is this
Publish button. And this allows you to
leave your login data, for example, for YouTube
and the Media Encoder, after having rendered
your video file, we'll import this file, upload it directly to YouTube. Now normally I choose this button to use the
maximum render quality. This will then take a little
longer to render out, but we really make sure that our finally rendered video has the best quality possible
via this Media Encoder. But for now, I think we have talked about
all the unnecessary and all the important steps that you can do here
in the Media Encoder. Again, my advice for
you would be if you use this encoder to import your projects directly from
After Effects and render in this H dot 264 format. And of course leave all
the other options Just as you've created your
composition in After Effects. Now, in the next video, we'll talk about another option. If you are not using
the Media Encoder. If you don't use the
Adobe Creative Cloud, then I want to show
you that using a free converting tool also allows you to
import, for example, the AVI file that we've
ran out before and reduce your file size by creating
another MP4 file. So for that one, see you in the next video.
22. Digression: Video Format Converter: This will be the last video
about possibilities to render an export your project
files from After Effects. And in this case, we want to talk about
an alternative solution without using the
Adobe Media Encoder. But still, you'd like to save your final file as an MP4
file or a similar format. However, you don't want
to stick with the AV or MOV file that are possible to render directly
from after effects. And what you could
do in this case is use a free video converter, like for example, the, any video converter
from a and V soft. This can be easily downloaded for either Windows or Mac user, and you could open
up the software and directly import your rendered, for example, AVI file
from After Effects, grab it and drag
it into this area. Then we want to do
some adjustments here, of course, for the
basic settings. We don't want to change the start or end
time of our video. Also, we want to leave
the video size as before. Basically it's all
just the same as in the last video where
we've talked about the settings with the encoder. We want to keep the quality
as high as possible, meaning it will be
a larger file size. But still of course, we want to choose the high option here. And for the video options, we will see that the video
codec in this case will be the x 26 for that I've
mentioned before, the video bit rate. You might want to change this to original bit rate and keep the frame rate as well as the
aspect ratio set to auto, and also for the audio options and nothing has to be changed. Then here, going back
to the basic settings, you will see that the
output folder in my case, will be after effects slash MP4. This can be changed anytime. Here in the general settings. In this case, I have created
this After Effects folder. Click Okay, if I
start converting now, then you'll see that my imported flyby title
sequence has been added to the Render Queue and very quickly is
perfectly converted. And we'll see it has a finite
size of 1.17 megabytes. For the filename, you'll
see that the codec used has been added to
the end of this file. And if I play this video now, you'll see that it still turns
out to be decent quality. Now, in general, of course, the more conversions
video has to pass, the more quality it
will lose over time. But I think in this case, without using the
Adobe Media Encoder, we can still be satisfied
with our final result, which will be a MP4 File. Now of course, my final advice
would be to, if possible, render with the Adobe
Media Encoder and directly import your
project from After Effects. But if you're not
using this encoder, then you might still
want to convert your AVI or MOV files with, for example, the
video converter. Now that's it for
now talking about different render settings and possibilities in After Effects. In the next video, we want to do quite the
opposite and talk about possible ways and formats to import data in After Effects.
23. Importing sources: Video, image sequences and more: Before going back to
work inside compositions and really create awesome
project examples. In this video, we
quickly want to consider the different input types and file formats that are accepted
in Adobe After Effects. Now, of course, as you can already see here
on the left side, the most common
of video formats, such as, for example, our rennet dot AVI, dot mp4 or dot MOV
files will be accepted. And they are video
and audio tracks will perfectly work here inside
Adobe After Effects. The same applies
for other formats, such as, for example, the W, m, v. But in the
worst-case possible, if you have a fire in a format that will not be accepted
in After Effects, you might find the
solution to use either the Media
Encoder or for example, a converter such as the
any video converter, to start converting your video into a common file formats
such as, for example, the MP4, and then
use that converted file to import it inside
Adobe After Effects. Of course, you can also
import audio files, such as, for example, the MP3
file or a WAV file. And what you can also do
is import picture formats, such as the PNG or JPEG format. And you can also import
a sequence of pictures, such as I have done here. This is a sequence of me going
with my drone in Mexico. And if I click on the
first picture here, I can select the option to
import the whole PNG sequence. And by doing so, what you'll see is that this will be
important as a sequence. And if I drag this into
a new composition, after Effects will do the interpretation
and frame by frame. This will be added up to create this short
video sequence. Now, you can even import 3D models inside
Adobe After Effects. Here we have an example of
this, diets, Coca-Cola. And what you can also
do is normally orbit around in 3D space
in these models, such as for example with
this Coca-Cola or what you could do is import a 3D
model of a mobile phone. But what you will need is
another external plugin. And I think in this
part of the course, this will go too far
and we just want to get started by creating the
next project example, and therefore will see
again in the next video.
24. Our goal: 3-dimensional phone model with individual screen content: Welcome to this new
project example, where we want to create
a 3D mobile phone with the possibility of individually animating our phone screen. And to be honest, this is a very spontaneous
project example because in the last video, I talked about possibilities
of importing 3D models. I showed you the Coca Cola can. And I talked about, for example, importing
a 3D mobile. And that's when I
just got excited to try to create my own sort of 3D model by model without
even using a 3D model. So what am I talking about? This image or this 3D mobile
phone that you can see here, has been created only by
using a 2D video sequence. And after all, we wouldn't
even need a video or we wouldn't need
as just two pictures, one of the front side
of our mobile phone and the other one of the
backside of iPhone. So you can take the
course materials. I've put a small
video and there, and I put a video because
I want to show you one more thing and
that is how to create freeze frames
out the videos. But we'll check
that out later on. But what we're going
to do to create in this project example
will be this one. Hello, and welcome to this comprehensive Adobe
After Effects course. Hello and welcome to this comprehensive Adobe
After Effects course. So what you can see, we can individually
animate our phone screen. Our phone does have a backside, and we can determine how
we want our phone to move in 3D space if we want
to even show the screen, for example, here on
the right side and move along with our phone
and many, many more things. So this project example
will really be exciting. And one reason why I chose to include this
example, this course, is that it shows very good
the one scale that I want to develop for you by Learning
and watching this course. This skill is to have a solution in mind what
you want to achieve, in this case, sort of
3D mobile phone model. And then develop the
skill or the ideas how to be able to produce
your solution. And in this case, as
I've already said, we are just using 2D images, putting them together to create a sort of 3D mobile phone. But you've seen what
we're going to create a. Now, let's get started with a new empty
project and see you again by starting with this product example
in the next video.
25. Part 1: 3D mobile phone face: So here we are inside a new and empty After Effects project. And this time we want
to start with a goal in mind and create our
final composition first. And this composition
later on will not only include the 3D
phone model itself, but also have this model
fly around in space as you've seen in the
previous video example. So we click composition,
new composition, or use the shortcut Control N, and name this one final comp. And the preset HDTV
should be fine in full HD with 25
frames per second. And the duration of
ten seconds is enough. So we click Okay and have
this composition created. Now we will fill this
composition with content later on, but for now, we want to start an import our phone or video from
the course materials. So just drag this video into our project files and then create a new composition
out of our MP4 file. And as you've seen the video, you might have noticed
that it not only includes view from the
front of our mobile phone, but also later on, we have the backside view of the mobile phone
we want to create. And of course, apart from that, there are some other useless and irrelevant notes that
you might have read. I was feeling funny So today. So if you like this course, feel free to recommend it, to give it a good rating. But now, let's get back to the
important things and start in this video by creating a front view of
our mobile phone. So what we want to do is
we want to find a frame that we can use for the front side of MOF
phone, maybe this frame. And then we want to mask
this frame, or better said, mask our mobile phone and use this frame as our front view. So in this case, you'll notice that there is a little rotation in this phone and we want to
straighten this up. So what you could do is either activate here the
proportional grid and check out those lines and hit R to show the rotation
and rotate it. Or you could also just create
a new solid, maybe in red. And just grab this solid, move it here to the side
of our phone and use this solid as a helping
layer to adjust our phone. Now, I want to
adjust the rotation. That's too much. Maybe sort of minus 1.5 should be good so that
it is perfectly adjusted. Then I can delete
my red solid again. Now we want to use a mask from these mask tools here to cut
around our mobile phone. Now, the problem here is that these masks will go along with
the rotation of our layer, meaning that the layer is now
is rotated by 1.5 degrees. But our mobile phone is flat and we would like our mask
to be flat as well. But if we now take this mask and make it a
little clearer by increasing the rotation and
navigate through those masks until you arrive with the rounded
rectangle tool. And now we create a mask. You will see that this
rectangle now is also rotated by 27.5 degrees. And do the last steps
with Control Z. However, we don't want the
rotation to be included in the mask as we've just
adjusted our phone to be flat. And that's why we now want to create a new pre-composition. And therefore mark
this layer and click on Layer pre-compose. And what we want to do now, we want to move all the attributes into
the new composition, meaning that we want to move the rotation into
the new composition. So we have, if we open
this new composition, we will see that
the rotation now as here inside this layer and this new created composition now as a rotation of 0 degrees. And now of course, we can take our rounded rectangle tool, start in the upper left corner and move to the bottom right. And before letting go
your left mouse button, you can adjust the roundness of this mask by either moving the arrow up to increase
the roundness or moving your error down to
decrease the roundness. And I think it should be fine
like this for first try. Now we let go. And then of course we will now
adjust each corner. First, we want to start
with the upper-left corner. Just take this mask point here, move it to the beginning
of the roundness. Take this point, move
it down a little. Then we can take
these small points to adjust the roundness. This corner is fine. And we do so for all
the four corners. Move down. Take this mask point, move it up a little. And lastly, our
bottom-left corner. A little bit more
roundness here. And this should be fine. So if we check out
our image now, you'll see that we have created a nice front view
of our mobile phone. But of course, right
now this front view is extracted from a video sequence. But when we want
to do, of course, is to use the current frame as a reference frame
and freeze it over time and use this frame the whole time of
our composition. I've intentionally included
a video sequence and the course materials
because I wanted to show you how this is done, which is very easy. We simply have to
right-click here and choose time freeze frame. Now of course, you could also time stretch your videos are compositions and then make the video play slower or faster. But in this case, we
really want to freeze the current frame and use this frame for the
whole composition. So you see that this
keyframe has been added. And no matter where
we are in time, this will be the front
view of our mobile phone. Now we can name this
phone composition. Hit Enter to rename it, and we want to name it front. And in this
composition, right now, as you can see, we have included the front view
of our mobile phone. And then the next
video we'll do the same for the backside
of our mobile phone.
26. Part 2: 3D mobile phone face additional information: Before we continue and create the backside view
of our mobile phone, I quickly want to show you that as always,
in After Effects, there are tons of different ways to come to a desired solution. And in this case, the solution we want
to achieve was to create a front view
of our mobile phone. We could have not only done so by freezing this frame and time, but what we could
have also done was to adjust and shrink the
work area to this one frame, either by manually picking
the brackets or by eating the shortcut b to mark the beginning
of the work area, and n to mark the end of the work area so
that in this case, the whole work area
consists of only one frame. And we take this frame or we take the whole
composition which only consists of this one frame and edits to the render queue. And now we want to change
the output module, make it either a JPEG
or a PNG sequence. So in this case, of course, we won't even render
a sequence because we've just added one
frame to the work area. But anyways, what is
very important is that for the channels
of the video output, you want to not only
include the RGB, but also the alpha channel. What this means, I will
show you in a few seconds, but for now we hit OK. And for the name, we
could, for example, name this one front underscore. And now you have these
five hashtags which only represent a running number in case we now would
create a sequence. Now we hit Render. And what we've created
now are rendered. Now is this image here, front underscore and
then the frame and time. And now can now
import this frame. And you can see that this frame
will be our mobile phone. And of course, this would
be the same result as, for example, freezing of frame. Now, the difference between
this random picture and the picture without the alpha
channel is the following. I have also render this one without including
the alpha channel. If I import this picture, you will see that we don't
have these transparent areas. All areas apart from our mobile, which have been transparent, are now rendered in black. And that's why it's
very important in this case to also include
the alpha channel. And we'll see more
about that when we create a t-shirt
design later on. But for now, I just
wanted to show you that, of course there are
several race to get to a desired image of the front
view of our model iPhone. Anyways, I will delete
the images again and we'll continue working
with the frozen frame. And now we will do the very same with the backside
view of our Melba.
27. Part 3: 3D mobile phone back: I'm pretty sure this will be
a very short sequence just because no new techniques
need to be explained. But what we're going to do
is we're going to adapt the very same technique
that we've used for the front side of
our mobile app to create an image of the
backside of a mobile phone. Therefore, we'll start
and take the MP4 video, create a new composition, and then we'll click
on this composition, rename it with Enter
and name it back. Now of course, we want to find a frame to use for the backside. Maybe this one is good. And we do the same
procedure again. So first of all, I create a new solid which will help me
to adjust my mobile phone. Bring it here to the left side. And then with this
layer checked, we hit R to bring up
the rotation and rotate it and move the red solid. Maybe minus 38 should be good. We delete the solid again, and now of course, we want to create
a new composition. Move all the attributes into
this new composition so that when creating a
new rounded rectangle, we will work here
without any rotation. I will mark our rounded
rectangle tool. And with the layout checked, we start in the
upper left corner. And again, let go here
on the bottom right. And now we move and
shake all those corners. Beginning with the
upper-left corner. Take this point and move
it a little to the right. This point maybe here,
adjust the roundness. And then we continue with
the upper-right corner. Move down. And we continue with the
lower-right corner here. Take this point and this point, move it a little to the left. Make it a little
more round here. Okay? And last but not least, the lower-left corner here. And there we are. So this will be the backside
of our mobile phone. And of course, again, we want to freeze this frame. So right-click
time, freeze-frame. To use this frame for the
whole time of our composition. And what we'll do in
the next video is sort of adjust and sink the back to our
front view before then creating the middle
part of the mobile phone, which will then, together
with the front and back view, creates this
three-dimensional look we want to finally achieve.
28. Part 4: Aligning phone face and back: Alright, so as already
mentioned in this short video, we want to sink and align the backside of our
phone to our front view. And therefore here I am
in the back composition and I want to take
my precomposition, hit Control X to cut the phone, open the front
composition control V, to add our phone to
this composition. Now to make it a little clearer, we want to add an
effect to the backside, which is Effect Generate Fill, so that our mask area
now is filled in red. And then we want to
bring down the opacity, use the shortcut T. We
lower the opacity maybe to 50% so that now we can grab our backside and
have a good overview. To sync the front and back side. Use your arrows to maybe
adjusted a little better. We can zoom in here and see that the backside is a little
smaller than the front side. So we want to use the shortcut Shift S to also add
the scale here, maybe bring it up 210 for. This looks good here. Maybe a little too large, so 103 should be good. Let's check on top. Alright, so this looks good. Now we have the backside
to our front side, so I can undo the fill
effect by hitting Delete. And we can bring
back the opacity, cut our backside again, hitting Control X, come back to our beck composition control
V to add the backside again. And now we have both sides sent. In the next video we will
add the middle part, which will stick between the front and the back
side and at the end, create this
three-dimensional look we want to have in our phones. So see you again
in the next video.
29. Part 5: Side area of the mobile phone: So in this video, we
want to talk about the middle part of our
phone or the outer face. And this video is kind of
where the magic happens. Although, as you'll
see in some seconds, It's a very simple trick to
achieve what we want to do. So right now we have fear, our front composition and we
can open the project data. And the first thing
I want to do is duplicate this
front composition. So Control D. And then we want to rename this second front
composition and name it mid. And now what we want to do with this precomposition is
turn on the 3D switch. But I'll do so in
the mid composition, not in the front composition. So open up the mid composition, turn on the 3D switch. And the only thing that has changed so far when turning on the switch is that we have
an additional position data, which is the z axis. If we look at this
now from the left, then you'll see that our
phone right now is flat in z, so it has only one
pixel size in z space. So what we want to do now is just duplicate this
precomposition. Hit Control D. Open up the position
data by using the shortcut P and then switching this z value from 0 to two to see it has moved
a little bit here to the left side of this view or to the backside
of the z axis. Now we want to duplicate
this layer again, open up the position
data and make it four, will do so again until we
arrive at the value eight. So one more time for 61, more time for eight. And you'll see that we start to get a little
thickness here in that space. But of course it's not enough. So what we want to
do is hit Control a to mark all
composition so far, Control D to duplicate them, bring them to the top, open up the position
data with P. And then for this 0 value, we want to continue with ten. So grab it and let go. When it hits the value ten. Then we have 1012141618. Do the same procedure
again with a five layer selected Control D to
duplicate those layers, bring them to the top, open the position data,
and now of course, change the value ten
to 20 by grabbing this value and
adjusting it so that the other values will also
add ten and their value, if you click inside
here and type 20 than all those five layers will have the value
20 afterwards. So now we have the
values from 0 to 28. And what we want to
do now is again, select all layers by hitting
Control a, duplicate. Those layers, bring
them to the top. Hit P to open the
positional data. And again, we want to change this 00 value and make it 30, so that we continue
from 28 to 30. Alright, there we are. So now we have the
values from 0 to 28, continuum with 3032
and so on until 58. Still a little bit too thin. And my opinion, maybe we want to continue until the eighties, so we take the values
from 58 to 40. And therefore you can
mark the value 40, mark the value 58 with
hitting Control Shift click. And then you have all
those layers from 40 to 58 selected. Now we want to duplicate
those layers again, bring them to the top, open the position data, and change the value from 40
here to 60. So there we are. And we have added the
values from 60 to 78. And I feel like this is a
good thickness for our phone. And now let's get back
to our active camera. Meaning in this case, we haven't created a camera, but it will be the front view. But we want to create a
camera now just to orbit a little bit around and see
if everything looks good. And therefore, we create
a new layer, new camera. We don't have to play with
these settings, just hit Okay? And now we can grab our
camera here and orbit around. Then we'll see that we have started to create a nice
three-dimensional phone. Now, in the next
video, of course, we will also add the backside
to our phone and maybe adjust the settings here
for the middle part, for the outer face a little bit so that the colors
will look even better. But as already said, that will
be part of the next video.
30. Part 6: The composition: So what did we do so far
in this project example? We have created, as you can see, a mid composition for the outer
area of our mobile phone. We have created a
bag composition including the backside view. And we have created a front composition for the front side view
of our mobile phone. Now, theoretically, if we just
consider the optical view of our phone and
would be enough to just add this back composition. Here on the backside of
our mid composition. Still, I also created a front composition
just because I want to afterwards have an
easier navigation and possibility to adjust
my phone screen. And that's why we will also put this front composition
here right before our first mid screen so that we can adjust the settings of our screen in this
front composition. So for now we want to stick those three compositions back, front and midst together. And therefore, we create
a new composition and we want to name
this one 3D mobile. Now for the preset, we will switch to a four K preset because
the underlying video, the phone dot mp4 file
was also for K video. And therefore we will create the 3D mobile model in for K. And later on the final
composition then again will be full HD only. Switch this to UHD for k
29.97 frames per second, as this is also
the frame rate of the phone video. Click. Okay. And now we want to import
the back composition, the front composition, and of course, the mid composition. Now let's start with the
mid composition only. So for now we'll turn off the switch for the front
and back composition. And what you can see here now
is a two-dimensional layer, which gives this three-dimensional
look of our phone. And that's because
the camera is still active and we have
orbited around. So we enter the mid
composition one more time and we will delete
the camera first of all. Then we're back to
this front side view. In this composition, we want
to now add a new layer, a new camera, by creating
new camera, click. Okay. And then of course, as we've already seen
with this short message, the camera needs a 3D
layer to work perfect. So therefore, we will again turn on the 3D switch for
this middle layer. And if we now fly
around with our camera, what you can see is that, yes, the mid composition
is a 3D layer, but still it only transports, only delivers right now
a two-dimensional image. This is because
this switch here, the collapse
transformations switch, has not been activated. If we now activate the switch, you will see that the layout finally is interpreted
as we want it to be. And we have this
three-dimensional phone back in our model here. Now, we need to add the front
and the back composition. And if you remember, the mid composition includes different layers in
different Z positions. The first that position
was at value 0, and the last one
was at value 78. So of course the bag needs
to be at zed value AT, and the front needs to
be at z value minus two. So first of all, we start maybe with the front, activate the 3D switch, activate the view of
this composition. And then we hit P
for the position. And we'll choose minus two. And if I fill this
composition Effect, Generate fill, then you'll
see that right now, our front composition really is what determines the
screen of our phone. We delete the effect again. Now for the back
composition, first of all, activate the view,
hit P for position. Turn on the 3D switch. And now change the
Z value to 80. And now let's fly
around again with our camera that we see the
backside of our phone. And there you go. We have the backside
view of our phone, perfectly included
in this 3D model. So that's it for this video. We have created our
3D mobile model. And now in the next
video we want to see if we can further bring these colors here
on the outside to perfection and make
some adjustments there. So for doing that, see you in the next video.
31. Part 7: Further adjustments: In this part, we want
to further enhance the colors here at the
side of our phone. Therefore, first of all, I'll orbit this back to sort
of a side view like this. And now I feel like the colors here are little too bright. Now, you might
think that this is very easy because
we can just select the mid composition
and then choose Effect Color Correction and maybe adjust the
brightness and contrast. If we, for example, decrease the brightness
to about minus 150, you will see that, yes, Now the side here looks darker, which for itself really
is more realistic. But now after Effects
will have some problems with interpretation of this
three compositions, front, mid and beg, and doesn't really know anymore how to
set those together, especially if we have a
collapsed transformation, like in this case. Now After Effects
doesn't really know how to handle those
compositions. And I can show you this by orbiting around again
to the back view. And you'll see that now the backside of our
phone has disappeared. And what we see is solve a transparent new phone
that we have created here. And this is because the effect has been added
to this mid composition, which has been a
collapsed transformation. So if I just delete
this effect again, you'll see that we are
back with our phone, back with the back view. But of course, now we don't have these nice darker colors
here on the side. So the second solution
you might develop is to just go into
the mid composition, create a new adjustment layer. And remember this
adjustment layer and the effects
will apply to it, will have an effect on all those layers below
this adjustment layer. So we could again choose Effect, Color Correction
and brightness and contrast and bring down the brightness
again to minus 150. You'd see that again. It has an effect, of course, you're on those layers
in the mid composition. But going back to
our final model, then again, you will see that
we have the same problem. And the backside again is not really displayed the
way we want it to be. So this solution
also doesn't work. So we delete the
adjustment layer. And now what we want to do to really get to
a solution that will work is adjust the
pre-composition, hear the phone dot
mp4 comp one and now plays an effect on
this found on MP4 file. Now before doing so, we have a small problem, which is that this
phone MP4 comp one has also been used in
our front composition. Because what we've done to
create the mid composition was we just duplicated
the front composition. So of course, this
phone dot mp4 comp one has its place in
the front composition, but also in a lot of duplications here in
the mid composition. Now, to of course, not have the effect applied to the front composition
because we still want our screen to be as
bright as it is now. What we want to do is duplicate this phone dot mp4 comp
one pre-composition. So with this one selected, we'll hit Control D and then
bring this phone dot mp4 comp three here into a front composition and now
replicate all the effects. We apply it to this
precomposition, which of course was to create a frozen frame
at this point in time. So time freeze frame. And then we apply the mask. So to open the mask settings, just hit the shortcut M. And
we want to take this mask, hit Control C and Control V to apply it
to this composition. And then we can delete the
phone dot mp4 comp one. So now we really have a new composition which itself
is the same as decomp one. But if we apply effects to this layer here
in the comp one, then of course, it
won't have any effect on our final front composition. I hope this was
understandable for you, but what we do now is we apply the effect again to
this found on MP4 file. And we choose Effect, color correction,
brightness contrast. And again, we lower the
brightness to minus 150. We'll see this has a direct
effect on our video. And coming back to our model
will now see that yes, we still have the
back side view here. And we also lower the brightness of the
colors here at the site. So once again, maybe we want to speak about these
project files here. The phone dot mp4 comp one. This now is part of
our mid composition. Only. The phone MP4 come to was part of our
back composition and the phone MP4 comp three precomposition
is a duplication of this comp one
pre-composition, only without the lowest
brightness of the phone video. And this is now the
product that is playing a role for the
front composition. So maybe to make it
a little clearer, we can hit Enter and name
this one mobile front. Here. We then have mobile MIT. And here we have mobile back. So once again, we check our mid composition and
you'll see there are a lot of replication of this
mobile MIT composition. And in this composition we have applied the brightness and affect the brightness
and contrast effect to the phone MP4 file. While here in the
front composition, we are using the
mobile front with also this phone dot mp4 file
in the very same frame. But of course, we still
stick with the brightness. So this our results and
our final phone model, which I now really
think looks quite good. Of course. You can further do more adjustments here to
make it look even better. Like for example,
with the back view, you could just draw a mask around this camera
and then again, choose different z values to
bring the camera out here. Or you could maybe also add some buttons
here at the side. But I think just for
understanding how 3D modelling can work without
even using 3D layers. So for the final aim
of this project, I think we are good to
go and what we want to do now in the next video is to let our final Mobile model fly around a little
bit in 3D space.
32. Part 8: Movement in space: So we have completed building
our 3D mobile model. We've checked it from
different perspectives, and I feel I'm happy with the final solution
that we've created. And therefore, I can
now delete this camera again from our
model composition. And we then can finally get back to our final
comp that we've created in the first step
of this project example. And of course in
this final comp, we now want to let the 3D
model fly in 3D space. So therefore, we will import this 3D mobile composition
into our final composition. And as the 3D mobile composition
was created in for K. While for the final comp, we can stick with full HD only. We, first of all, I want
to lower the scale of this 3D molar composition
to 50 per cent and see that now our
mobile is perfectly fine here and adjusted in
this full HD composition. So next step, of course, is to turn on the 3D switch
for this mobile composition. Just to see that we have
the same problem as before. I'll show you by
creating a new camera. Click. Okay, and again, we orbit
around a little bit, just to see that. Again. While the 3D mobile composition itself is a
three-dimensional layer, the zed value only
came out in one pixel. So of course, we again
want to activate the collapse
transformations to then see that our mobile phone is
back as we have created it. So next step, we want to animate the position as well as rotation data from
this mobile phone. Therefore, I'll start
and turn off the camera. And then we want to open
the Transform options. And what we want
to animate now in detail is the position
as well as the X, Y, and Z rotation. First of all, I'll show you
what these rotations mean. The x rotation will create a rotation
around our red arrow. And of course, the Y rotation will create a rotation
around the green era. And the z rotation will create a rotation
around our blue arrow. So let's start and
activate the stopwatches, x, y, z, as well
as the position. And in my preview video, I created the effect
that our phone, first of all was here on the
upper right part outside of our preview area,
then flying in, slowing down here for maybe one or two seconds and
fly a little bit over to this left side and
then rotating and flying out of the
preview area at the end, maybe around the 3 second mark. So let's try to recreate that. Although of course,
you are free to create whatever movement and
rotation you like to do. So, first of all, maybe let's add a
little x rotation. But focusing on the Y
rotation maybe to like this. And then bring the x position down here to the right side. Also move up. And maybe this should be a
good starting point. Then we get to, for example, half or two-thirds of
a second like here, frame 16 should be fine. And we want to now fly
to our visible area. Of course, primary lower the Y Rotation again to make
our screen visible. And then come down in the y
value to maybe about here. And here should be fine. Now we want to stay in the
visible area for maybe 1.5 or two seconds here. But what we could do is maybe spin a little and fly
to the left side. So we open the
screen of our phone. Therefore, maybe like
this should be fine. Then of course, bring
the x value more to the left side. Here. Also maybe move a little bit up and then gets
to the 3 second mark. And now we want to be a
little more spectacular. Maybe rotate this
1.5 times around x. And a little bit also in y. And then of course, for the position, fly
out of the visible area, maybe flare up again
so that finally, finally we have created
a parabolic movement. And then I want to hit N to
mark the end of my work area. Now, let's quickly check by just dragging this time Mark and see
what we have created. This should be the movement and then fly and rotate
out at the end. Looks good so far. So what I'll do now
is preview this, which will take some time. And if the process is ready, then we will see again. So this is what we
finally created. And to be honest with
only using two pictures, one from the front and one from the back
of our mobile phone. I really think that we have
created a cool 3D model flying around in space and
look in quite realistic. Now, what we want to also add a background to this
final composition. Therefore, you know, the
method we create a new layer. Layer, New Solid. Make
this one maybe dark gray. Click Okay. Rename that
solid to Biji one. Bring it to the lowest
position here from the layers. Duplicate that layer,
bring down the background to adjust the solid
settings, make it black. And then add a mask to
our background one. An elliptical mask. Start in the upper left, bring it down to
the lower right, and then featherless mask. And shrink the mask a little. Maybe even decrease
the mask opacity to 50 per cent to make it
a little more dark. And this gives the
whole composition more realistic look, I think. And what we also want
to finally add is a new adjustment layer
and maybe increase the contrast of the whole
composition a little bit and therefore Effect
Color Correction. And maybe bring up
the curves here. And now, pull this string
here a little more up here, a little more down. This means make
the darker colors even darker or lighter,
Carlos, even lighter. So all in all we increase the
contrast so that right now, I really think this looks
a little bit better, especially here on the
screen of our phone. So I think we are ready with the flying
effect of this phone. But what's missing is an individually
animated phone screen. And this will be the final
segment of this section. And therefore we see
again in the next video.
33. Part 9: Customizing the phone screen: Now here we are already
in the last part of this video series about
our 3D mobile phone. And what we want to do in
this last video, of course, is to create an
individual phone screen. Now, you might remember
that what determines the phone screen we see here is what we create in
the front composition. Because this front composition in terms of the Z position, laying in front of the mid composition
and that of course, is laying in front of
the bike composition. So now we can switch to
our front composition. We just need to change
this phone screen here. So therefore, I have also included an example video
here in the course materials. This is just done by a simple
screencast of my phone. There are several apps
on the App Store or Play Store that you can
download for free to, for example, screencast,
what you do with your phone. You might go to check
your YouTube channel. You might link to your Instagram account or
whatever you'd like to show in this flying mobile
sequence that we've created. So for now, I will just import this phone screen here that is a screencast of
the Udemy course. And right now I will take this MP4 file and just drag it into our
front composition. And now all we've
got to do is place this phone screen here
right on top of our phone. So let's just bring it here. And then or maybe
we'd take it to the side to see if it's still
a little bit too large. Therefore, I hit S to
open up the scale, maybe scale it down
to 95 per cent. My advice would be to leave this a little bit
larger than what we finally need here
because we will just also create a rounded
rectangle for this at the end, as you can see here,
so that we have a little bit roundness
in the edges. But of course, we still
don't want to see any parts of our
old phone screen, but just leave this a little
bit larger so that we will just see this phone screen and our phone here at the sites. So now I can bring this here, further adjusted with my arrows. Now. Maybe make it a little
bit larger to 95.595, comma five and Germany. Alright, so now we won't see
any parts of the old screen. And now we can grab our
rectangle tool here, switch to the rounded rectangle and go to the upper left corner. Come down here to the
lower right corner. And before letting go, we can adjust with our
arrows the roundness again. In a thing like this, it fits the phone. So we can let go. Now we see that we have sort of created
this phone screen, but here at the right side
we still see our old screen. So therefore, I'll just grab those two mosque positions here. And now I can move the arrow
a little bit to the right. That was too much
like this maybe. And then we see that now we are only seeing the
new phone screen. And it really looks like this
is integrated in our phone. Still as this was a screencast, I feel like the contrast and brightness is a
little bit too high, and therefore, I'll
choose Effect, color correction,
brightness contrast. And we want to lower the
contrast a little bit. Maybe minus 15. Also bring down the
brightness to minus 15. And maybe even adjust
the saturation. Therefore, we can
choose Hue saturation and bring down the saturation
a little bit to minus ten. So that it looks a
little more realistic like a real integration
of this phone screen. Now of course, you can improve this basically
until infinity by, for example, also adding a reflection effect
here on this video. But for this demonstration case, I think that it's already
looking quite good. And therefore we can
now switch back to our final comp and see
that this green now is perfectly integrated here into our flying phone in 3D space. Now, we might adjust the
timing of this screencast a little bit to push the focus really on our
After Effects course. Like this. In this case, it's a screencast of my German After
Effects course. And we really see that
this course is now in-focus of this
flying mobile phone. Now what I've also
done in the preview of this flying 3D model is that I've also added the screen
here at the side of our phone. And of course that's quite easy. We switch back to our front
composition and in this case, I'll demonstrate the effect
by just adding a text here. But you might of course
also, for example, a copy or duplicate this phone screen here and
put it here to the side. But for now, I'll
decide for texts. And maybe we just right after effects increase
this texts in size. For example, like this. Then in this case, of course, it's aligned to the right. And now I bring it maybe here, right beside our phone. And of course, as this
front composition is integrated in 3D space. First of all, in our 3D mobile and then of course in
the final composition. And therefore we see that
this text will now as well move with the positional change of our 3D mobile composition. And of course, as I've
already mentioned, you could apply the same
effect not only for texts, but you could sort of show the screen again
a little bigger here, like when the preview video
of this course starts. Or what you might also do is
in this front composition, maybe bring out simple symbols, are just some elements
of this text. To shoulder the focus
on those elements. You are really free to
create whatever you like. I think for this example, I hope you learned
how to be able to create a 3D mobile without
even using any 3D elements. So basically, all we
needed was just an image from the front view of our phone as well as
the backside view. And then we've added a
screencast of a phone, which is also very
easy to create. This sort of leads us to a really nice
three-dimensional phone that is flying in space. So for now, we are finished
with this segment and we will continue with another nice project example in
the next video.
34. Our goal: Animating Music - Video2Music: Now here we are with
another project example. And in the process of creating such a music wheel
as you see here, you are going to get to know expressions and how to use
them in After Effects. And we're also going
to take a look at some new effects that we haven't used so far in this course. Now, the final goal, of course, is to animate elements to
the beat of the music file. And again, the audio dot
mp3 file is of course included in the course materials and ready to use for you. But before going into
too many details, let's just check
what we are going to create in the next videos. Now, as you can see,
there's really a lot going on in this
project example. We have the changing text here in the spike
moments of our beat, as well as the beat itself displayed one time in
a circular fashion, as well as these spikes here
displayed in a line form. So a lot of things are waiting for us and
therefore we will see again in the next video and start with an empty project.
35. Part 1: The audio spectrum effect, polar coordinates and aligning on mask path: Now, before we create a new and empty project
in a couple of seconds, let's just quickly
summarize one more time the necessary steps
that we're going through to create this music. We'll now first of all, what you see is this text here, which is of course changing in the moments of
heavy beat kicks. And what we're also
going to add in our project is an
animation of text size. I haven't done so in
the example I created, but just in order to
demonstrate that we can animate any property we want to. We will also add and change the text size going
to the beat later on. Then of course, we
have this music wheel which has been animated
in two different ways. First of all, we
have a digital form here with these strikes
going in and out. And then we have this
closed line form, which is as well going to the
beat and the whole music. We'll composition itself with the texts and with
those circles is also rotating and moving a
little random here in space. So those would be the
necessary steps we will take. And in this video
we will start with these two circles you see here on the outside of our text. So let's finally go by
creating a new project. And in this case, we
want to start by simply importing our audio file
from the course resources. And then dragging this file
into a new composition, which will then of course have the same length as our MP3 file. Now, in order to create those two wheels that we've
seen in the last video, what we want to do is add a new solid and then apply an
effect to that solid, which recreate a line
here in the x space with the amplitude of our
music data in the y position. And after having done so, I will show you two
different methods of how you could
transform the x and y data into sort of a circular way of
displaying our music data. The first method
will be based on a second effect that we
want to apply to our layer. And the second method will be based by simply modifying
our first effect. So the effect that we've chosen to display our music data, because this effect can be
aligned to different forms. And then of course,
we can choose a circle form that we want
this effect to be applied to. So let's get started by, first of all,
creating a new solid. We want to name this solid. We'll one, make it come size, which in this case is still for k. We haven't added
any video data so far, so the comp size
will be the same as the last composition
you've created. For now, I'll hit
Cancel for a second and switch to the
composition settings. Change the preset to HDTV, 25 frames per second in full HD. As I think that's totally
enough for our music. We'll then get back to creating a new Solid.
Make it come size. Of course now full HD. And the name, again, we'll one. The color doesn't
matter in this case, as I show you in a second. And then we hit Okay, to create this new solid. And now we want to
apply an effect to that layer which will be Effect generate audio spectrum. And what you can see
already here is the line on the x position that
I've explained to you with the amplitude
in y position. But however, for the
amplitude right now as I move forward and
backward here in time, you see that so far there
is no amplitude and this is because the audio layer
is set on one wheel one. But it has to be, of
course, our MP3 file. So we switched that
to audio dot mp3. As you can see now, if I move forward and backward in time, this audio spectrum effects
starts to work and interprets our music data to show the
amplitude here in whitespace. Now, let's first of all, maybe shrink our work
area a little bit so that we can focus on this small area here and now make some changes
to this effect. To have a better look
for our final music. We'll now first of all, we want to change the
start and end point. Those points, you can
see them here. And here. We want to change
in the exposition. So for the start point, we will bring down the
expedition from 192 to 0 to really get it to the left
side of our preview area. And this, of course, will also be changed
to this point, which in full HD is
at position 1920. Now, next thing we can change is the number of frequency bands. So the number of lines, you will see here, right
now it's set to 64. If we increase this number, you'll see that we
get more details. In our audio view. Maybe we'll switch
it to 250 like this. And then we want to also
change the maximum heat, bring it up so that we have harder hits for our audio view. This looks quite good. And next in line would be
to change the thickness. The thicker. You will change this, it starts to look
a little blurry. So let's bring this back
down to maybe three. And then we want to
change the inside and outside color and switch them to sort of a greenish
or bluish color as I've done in the preview. Maybe this green for
the inside color and this blue here for
the outside color. And what I haven't applied in the preview I created is
the hue interpolation. If we increase this
interpolation, then you'll see that the more
degrees you will add here, the more of the full
color spectrum will be added to this display. And I think this
looks quite good, so I'll increase
it to maybe 330. And next in line would be the
different display options. In this case, we
have decided to show a digital way of display, but we could also switch
this to analog lines. This will be the
form that we choose for our inner circle later on. Then of course, we
have another one which is the analog dots. So for now we want to stick with the digital display and then
we have the site options. And these will only
decide on whether you want your lines to be
only going upwards, are only going downwards
or as in this case, going in both ways. So of course, changing
to site a will let the effect only
apply and move upwards. Site B, you might guess, we'll show this effect
only going downwards. Side a and b will be the effect symmetrically in
both directions. Now, this looks fine so far, but what we want to
do now of course, is transform this line
into a circular view. Before doing so, let's
just preview and see that this animation is
really going to our music. So yes, this is going along
to the music quite nicely. But now let's finally switched the way of display
to a circular way. Therefore, of course, with
the layer selected again, the first method we want
to add another effect, and this will be Effect
Distort polar coordinates. Let me just close this audio spectrum
effect to have a better view for
the new effect. And what we can do
here is convert either the polar
way of display to a rectangular way or
rectangular to polar. And that's of course
what we want to do here. And if we now increase
the interpolation, you will see that
we start to sort of transform our
coordinates to a circle. And if we bring it
up right to a 100, you'll see that we've perfectly edit this closed circle here. Then of course, the
amplitude is displayed the same way as before
with the lines. And as this will finally be the lines which should
be on the outside, where we will add another wheel with a closed line
here on the inside. And therefore I will go
back to our audio spectrum. And I want to change
the site options to only display to the
outside of the circle. And therefore, I
think it's sine B. Yes. Then let's see, for the
heat of those spikes, I think we can even increase
that a little more. Let's see where there's
a heavy hit here. So maybe we want to increase the maximum heat to about 2900. And I think this
looks quite nice. So we are finished
with the first circle. And what we want to do
now is simply take this, we'll hit Control D to
duplicate this wheel. And now we want to
rename the second. We'll hit Enter and name it. We'll do with this
second, we'll, we want to change the display
option to analog lines. And I think although
this is quite different than what I've
done in the video preview, I feel it's looking really nice. What we can maybe change here
is increase the scale of this whole layer to
maybe 105 per cent. To add here a little space in between the first
and the second. We'll now think this
looks really cool. We can leave it as it is and then add a third
wheel this time. So we duplicate our
second wheel again. And this third wheel. Should be placed here on
the inside of that wheel. So first of all,
we want to change the site options to side a. Then we want to maybe scale this one down a
little bit to 95%. And then for this we'll maybe we don't want to show
the whole color spectrum, so we will decrease this, bring it maybe to only 30. Really focus on those two inside and outside
colors that we have selected for this line maybe increase the
thickness like this. And let's check by moving forward and
backward a little bit. I don't want these hits to be as hard on the inside as on
the outsides, like here. So therefore, will decrease
the maximum heat for this one. Maybe like this. And that looks quite
good. I think. Now of course, as with
any project example, you can do your
individual changes and adjustments to make
it look even better. You've seen that this also
looks quite different than what I've created
for the preview video. So any project is
individual, but for now, let's just see what
we've created so far. Now, first of all, sorry that
this sounds a little weird. It's because the preview was
not played in real time, but a little slower so the
music sounds a little awkward. But still we can see
that the effects are nicely applied and move along
to the beat of our music. But there's one problem. And this is the little
break here on top, because the line here from
the left to the right has been transformed
to this circle. Then of course, it doesn't
have the same effect here in the moment where
the circle is put together. Therefore, I have already
told you that there's another method that doesn't use this polar
coordinates effect, but is directly applied to
the audio spectrum effect. And therefore, let's
quickly turn off the second third wheel and delete this polar
coordinates effect. What we want to do now with
this audio spectrum effect is used the option to
align it to a path. And therefore, we
could either add an individual path
or use some of these mask options here to
add a path to this layer. And for demonstration purposes, maybe we want to start navigate through
those tools again by hitting Q and add a
star to this layer. So we start here in
the middle and then create this star path. And now we can choose to align our effect to this mass
that we've just added. And then you'll see that the spectrum starts to go
along our created star. Now here, of course, as the layer is cut because
we've added this mask, you'll see that also the
amplitude is Cartier. So what we want to do
is switch the mask itself from add to none so that the mask itself won't be
applied to our layer, but just used as a path. And then again, you'll see
that we have those amplitudes perfectly displayed again
along our star here. Now of course, we don't
necessarily have to use a star, so we'll delete that again. And what we want
to do is switch to an elliptical tool and then
start drawing an ellipse. And if you hit Shift, you'll make sure that it will be a perfectly drawn circle. Maybe want to let go like this. Then with the mask
selected here. So choose only the mask. You can move this mask
with your arrows, bring it into the middle again, and then choose the
path again to mask one and switch the mask
itself off to none. So now again, you will see that the amplitude is aligned
around our circle. And also the break
we used to see before doesn't appear
to be there anymore. So what we want
to do, of course, is also align those other wheels to a mask instead of using
the polar coordinates effect. Therefore, we will
start by bringing back our second wheel and then
deleting the polar coordinates. Choose the mask here, hit Control C, Control V to
apply it to our second wheel. And then of course, in the effect as well, change the path to mask one. Now, as the mask is scaled the same way that your
layer is scaled. It is of course,
important that the wheel itself is centered
in the composition. Because if not, and you
scale up the second wheel, then it might be that the
second wheel is a little off in terms of its relation
to the first wheel. So if the circle
would be here on the left side and you
scale up the layer, then of course
this scale doesn't originate from the
center of this wheel. Therefore, it doesn't perfectly
match the first real. But anyways, what you
could do is just bring up the mask options here
with clicking m. Then select the mask and
individually position that mask by using your arrows. So for now I want to bring this perfectly above our first, we'll think it's okay like this. And then again, take
this mask Control C, apply it to our third, we'll bring back the view of our third wheel and delete
the polar coordinates. And then again switched
the path to mask. One. Makes sure that the mask is perfectly aligned
in the center of music. We'll now I think we have a very nice animation going along to the
beat of our music. And let's finally check out
what we've created so far. Alright, looking
quite nice so far. In the next video, we want to introduce the use of expressions and also add
a text to our animation.
36. Part 2: Introduction to Expressions: In this video, we want to go
a step further and extract our music data to make it
accessible for any effect, for any property, we'd
like to connect it to. Remember, in the last video, we applied the audio
spectrum effect, which itself looks quite
nice, but of course, limits the way we want to
display our music data. And now for this case, we want to choose another tool. And this will be by
selecting the MP3 file, right-click and choose
keyframe assistant. Convert audio to keyframes. Now, this will add a new layer audio amplitude
inside our work area. Let me just shrink this
to make it better visible here that we are focusing
on the work area. And you'll see that this
new layer has been added. Now, the layer itself
is a null object, which can also be
edits by choosing Layer New Null Object. And you'll see that
such a null object is displayed by
this little square. But the layer itself, you can imagine it to be sort
of an information carrier, meaning it has the same options, the same transform
options like position, scale, rotation, et cetera. But the layout won't
be rendered at final. What you can of course
do is, for example, connect the position of some other layers to the
position of the null object. And if you then change the
position of this null object, then of course it will have
direct effect on the way. You'll see your composition
here in the preview area. But if not connected to any properties than
this null object is only a carrier of
information for you to make it better
accessible when desired. And in this case, the information that
is carried here in this audio amplitude layer is the music data in
the left channel, right channel, and
both channels. So this will be
an effect that is applied to this null object. By the way, we have
chosen to select the keyframe assistant and convert our audio
to those keyframes. Now here we have the left and
the right as well as both, as well as both channels. Because sometimes when
you hear a song with, for example, your earphones, you recognize that
some instruments are played louder on
the left channel, or some instruments are
left out on some channels. But in this case, both channels will be the same. And we'll hear the same song, the same instruments on the left side than
on the right side. And because of that, what
we want to do is delete the left channel by selecting
it and clicking Delete. Also the same for
the right channel. And we want to focus here on
this both channels effect. Now, if we open this effect, you'll see that a slider has
been added with keyframes. That safety information
of our music data frame. For frame. Here inside our work area, we
have this slider, which is going
from a value close to 0 to a value of about 50. In the moments like
here of heavy hits. We can also make it a little
more visible by selecting the slider and opening
the graph editor. Then you will see that this is the way our
music is played. And we have, of course, some moments of low volume and we have some moments of harder hits inside
our music track. What we want to do now is add a text to our composition and then link some properties of the text to this
audio amplitude. Display it here in the
both channels effect. So we go ahead and create a new text by choosing
this text tool. And maybe we just click
here and start with music. Make it a little larger in area. Bolt. And bring it here to the middle. But we'll adjust that later on. And now what we can
do is maybe start by selecting the scale
of this music layer by hitting the shortcut S.
And now we want to link the scale of this text layer to the slider of the
audio amplitude. And we can do so by choosing
this pick whip tool here, and then let go
here on the slider. Now what you'll see is that
the scale has changed its, its value in this case, in this frame to 40.5. So the same as the slider. And now those percentages
are displayed in red. And of course, the scale
at any frame and time now has the same value in
X and in Y, S, the slider. And as we have the
value displayed in red, this means that
now an expression has been added to this scale. And we can open the
expression by clicking on this small arrow here and
you'll see the expression. For now I want to close the graph editor to make it
a little better visible. The expression that has been
added by this picker tool is that we have added a
variable which will be temp. And this variable
will be connected with the value from the
layer audio amplitude. So from this null object layer, the effect both channels
and the value slider. So this of course, is this exact value here. This variable, them to be transported to
the scale will be temp, in X and in Y. So of course, the scale has
two dimensions, x and y. So this variable will be
displayed in X and in Y to be the exact same amount as our slider from the
audio amplitude layer. Now, let's for 1 second
solo this text layer and preview what we
have connected so far. Again, sorry that
this video was played a little slower than real time. This is because my PC
has too much to do at the moment to record myself. We're previewing this and
rendering some other things. But I think it gets
clear that the music, the scale, is moving to
the beat of our music. Now, the next thing we want
to do is we don't want our music to scale down to about 0 or close to 0 like here, below ten per cent in the
moment of low volume. But we want our music to
be at least scale a 100%. And in the moments of those hard hits we
wanted to scale up. Or let's say in
every moment we want to add this scale to the, to the value of 100. And this can be easily
done in different methods. The easiest one would be to just take our temp x data at a 100, take our temp, why
data and add a 100. And now you'll see
that it will change from 47.1% to 147.1%. Again, play this and
preview what we've done. And again, you'll see
that the text layer is moving to our
bead from the music. Now, another way of
displaying or achieving the same thing here is to add a second bracket
and then adding a 100100 outside of
our first temp, temp. Now of course, you
could also apply other mathematical operations
like multiplication. This with the value of two, subtracting some other values or whatever you want to achieve. Now, in the next video, what we want to do
is in the moments of small changes here or
from low volume moments. We don't want our music to move or to scale like a little bit. But what we want
to have is a value and below that value
of music hits, we want our scale
to be the same. And only in the moments
of those hard hits. Let's check it one more time
here in the graph editor. So in these areas, we don't want any change to
be applied to our scale, but only if the value reaches
a certain unit amount, we want the scale to scale up. So this is what we're going to focus on in the next video.
37. Part 3: The Linear Expression: Once again, what do we want
to achieve in this video? So we basically want to dismiss these small changes
in scale as here, 101%, 102 are in these areas, one hundred and fifty and
one hundred and sixteen. So we want to dismiss
these small distortions here and only concentrate
on those heavy hits here, close to 50 units. So let's say at the end, we want to dismiss
all changes in scale below 40 units and only concentrate on
those moments where we are above 40 units. And therefore,
what we need to do is modify our expression. We can either modify the value of this slider here by
adding an expression here, or we can directly modify
the expression in the scale here that currently is directly
referring to this slider. And the way we want
to modify it is by introducing so-called
linear expression. With this linear expression, what you can do is transform a range of values to a
new range of values. And at this moment
it might sound a little complicated,
but don't worry, I will explain
step-by-step how to use this linear expression. But first of all, let's
speak about on where you can apply this expression. Now the first option would be to directly change this
variable temp here, which by the way, of course, you could also rename and name this one audio for example. And then what we need to do, of course in these brackets, has changed the temp
variable name also to audio. But now let's concentrate
on this linear expression. So what you could do is
refer the audio variable, of course, to our slider. So this value here, but then apply the linear
effect to this slider value. And this is just for
demonstration purposes that I'll close this bracket. The expression itself has
more values to put into. But for now, this is just to demonstrate that this
would be one method of how you could introduce the linear expression so that the variable itself will
take the slider value, which then is considered for
the linear expression and this linear expression than will be applied to
the scale x and y. And then again, we want
to add the a 100% value. Another method would be to apply the linear expression directly
here with the slider, but we'll see about
that right now. So I want to delete the
linear expression from here. We want to apply the
linear expression to this slider value. Now the thing here
is that we didn't introduce any
expression here so far. And we also don't want to use
the picker at this moment. So there's another method
to introduce expressions. And that is by hitting
the Alt button on your keyboard and then clicking on this stopwatch
with the odd button pressed. Thereby, you will see that the value itself will change
again to the red color, meaning that we have
introduced an expression. And you can also see
that here again, the expression will open up. And currently, what
we are using for the value of the slider is
the effect both channels. Now in this case we want
to modify this value. So again, we will apply linear open bracket and
close this bracket. And then we need to apply
an ad for more values here. And I will add those and explain later on
what they are meaning. So for now I'll add
one comma 1000, comma 100, comma 0, comma 200. Now, this means
that first of all, the first value of
course, is our source. Where do we want the linear
expression to be applied to, in this case, of course, to our both channels
effect to this value here, which in this case, in this frame is 16.2. Then we have with
these two values, we have our source
range of values. And here we have our goal or
our target range of values. So in this case, what we
want to do is we want to transform the value 0 to 0, and we want to transform
the value 100 to 200. And in-between we want to
linearly transform the values, meaning that a value
of, for example, 50 in this case will be
transformed to a 100. A value of 0 will be
transformed to 0100 to two hundred
fifty, two hundred. A T21, 160. And you'll see
that in this case, any value in between 0100 will just be multiplied
with the value of two. And also any value below 0 will be transferred
transformed to 0, and any value above 100 will be transformed
to the value 200. So if there's originally
a value of 110, it would now be 200. The same for one hundred,
fifty, five hundred. All those values will
be transformed to 200. And also the values
below 0 minus ten minus 50 will all be
transformed to 0. So this was B. This will be the first example on how to
use the linear expression. Now, just to see, originally we had the value
16.2 and if I hit Okay, and now you'll see
it will be 32.4, so it will be the double value. Now, what we could also do
is change the range from 0, maybe 2, two hundred,
three hundred. And now this would mean
that we would simply add the value 200 in-between
the values 0100. So if we now have a
value, for example, of ten, this will be
transformed to 210, while 90 will be transformed to two hundred and
ninety and a hundred, of course to three hundred
and one hundred and fifty also to 300, a value of minus 20, again also to 200. So this would be just a switch or we will just add the value of 200
in-between those values. Now, but let's see
how we can directly use the linear expression
to achieve what we want to. And in this case, we want
to use our slider value. And as you've seen before, we want any value below 40
to be transformed to 0. And we want any
value above 40 to 50 to be transformed to
the interval 0 to 100, and any value above 50, we want to be transformed to
a 100. So what can we do? We will write 40 comma 50 comma 0, comma 100. So in this way, 3536040, all those values up to 40, where we transform to 0. And all values above 50 will
be transformed to a 100. And all the values
in-between will be linearly transformed to our new range 0. And in this case, of course, the original range had a length of ten and the new range
has a length of a 100. So any one change here will have an influence of
ten points in the new scale. So 40 will be 041, will be 1045, would
be 5049 will be 90. And of course 50, or any
value above will be a 100. So for now we'll hit
okay with this one. And now you'll see that
what we have achieved, if we take our slider and again, choose to see the graph, then you will see that
all these moments here, where we are below 40 will
now be transformed to 0. So all those moments here. The slider originally
was at 151614 units. Right now, the final
result will be 0. And only here in those moments, here we have the slider at a 100 or close to a 100,
like here, 69. Anyways, in the
range of 0 to 100, only in the range here
where they are heavy hits. So this is one way of how you could use the
linear expression, as already said here directly in the expression
for the slider. And another option would be to delete the linear
effect here and only use our slider like this. And again, apply
the linear effect here for the audio variable. And then of course, use
the very same values which have been comma 40, comma 50, comma 0, comma 100. Now, close this expression here. And again, you will see that the original value was
46.94 in this moment. And our new value is 169.4. And this is because
first of all, we have added a 100 and
then the interval of 40 to 50 has been linearly
transform to 0 to 100. So 6.94 has been
transformed to 69.4, as I have already explained. Or one step in the original value will be transformed to ten
steps in the new value. And only in the moments
where we are above 40, we will have a direct
effect on our scale. Now, the last thing I want to explain is that we
could of course, also now get rid of, get rid of this plus a 100100. Because we could also modify
our linear expression. And therefore we don't want
to transform 40520 comma 100. But what we want to
do is transform, transform 40 to a 100. So 100 will be our
minimum value and 50 will be our maximum value. And therefore we want
to change it to 200. So we have added a 100 points here in the linear expression. And now we can delete the 100
here in the audio camera, audio plus a 100100. And you'll see that
if I now close this expression will still be with 169 comma 4%. So I hope this got a little clear on how to use
the linear expression. And now let's see
what we have created by again, previewing this video. So now you've seen
that the music really only scales up in the
moments of those heavy hits. While most of the time it
sticks with a 100% scale. So this is what we wanted
to do for this video. And in the next video, we want to further adjust our music texts and add
some other effects to it.
38. Part 4: Link more parameters to the Music: So first of all, what we see with this
music texts layer, let me just deactivate
this solo button again. What we see is in a
moment this scales up. The origin from
the scale seems to be here at the bottom, right. Because the text will scale
and leave its position here in the center of
this wheel to just scale up to the
upper left corner. But of course we want
the music to really scale out of the inside
from this circle. So what we can do
is, first of all, we choose the paragraph and
make it a central text. So now what we see is that it doesn't scale from
the bottom-right anymore, but from the center
in the bottom. And this is because
this little point here, the anchor point of that text is laying below the text itself. So what we want to do is
bring up the anchor point, which is a transform option. You can see it here,
the anchor point. And this should be changed to really the
center of this music text. Especially the y value, needs to be changed here. And we will do so so
that the point of the anchor is really in
the middle of our text. Now, if we scale
this text, again, you'll see that the
music really appears to scale from the
center of the text. So now what we can
do is just grab this music texts or maybe just open the
alliance settings, align it horizontally
as well as vertically. Then we see that our music
wheel as a little bit off. So what we can do is just
grab those three wheels. We have one hit Control
Wheel too, and we'll three. And just move it
with your arrows to fit the arrangement of the
music texts like this. So, so far, we have created those two
wheels on the outside, or in this case three wheels. And then we have
the music texts, which will scale in
those heavy hit moments. Now, in these moments, I also want to add
another effect. And to make this
work out as planned, we first of all want to change the basic color of our
music texts layer. We could now change the character color
here and maybe make it a light blue or even picking this color
here from our wheel. Or what we could do
is add a gradient. So Effect Generate
Gradient Ramp. And now maybe we could start
with the color here on top and end with the
color here at the bottom. And then maybe choose the start RAM to be here
and the end to be here. So this will be our basic color. And now what we want to
do is add an effect, which will be the glow effect. So we choose Effect,
stylize glow. And now we could play with
some of these settings here. So the glow radius determine how the text will be affected in
terms of its surrounding. Then we have the threshold, which will change the brightness necessary in our texts
layer in order to be affected by the glow effect. And of course we have the
general glow intensity. Now, let's bring all those
values back to standards. So we just click Reset here. And maybe now we can link
the glow radius again to the beat of our music so that an order in the moments
of these heavy hits, the glow radius
will be increased. So what we can do is click on this below radio stopwatch in order to activate
an expression here. And you'll see the color
will change to red. And then we have
this glow radius opened up here at the bottom. And here again, we can
find this pick whip tool. So before choosing that, we want to make sure that
we can see our slider here. And now of course, we again want to link
this radius by choosing the pick whip tool and
coming all the way down to our slider
and let go there. So that of course, we just leave this
expression as it is. You'll see that
the radius changes to the actual value
of the slider. Now, before we have used
the linear expression, and I have shown you two different methods how to use this linear
expression. In our case. The first method
was to just write this expression here
inside of our slider. And the second option was to add the linear expression to this variable here
inside the scale. And now of course, we want the linear option again
to be applied here. But as this has been just written inside the
variable here, we now need to write the linear expression
either again, here. At the top or adjust, cut the linear expression from here and paste it
here onto the effect. But let's just write it
here on this top layer, once again inside the radius. So that also we
have a little bit more of freedom to
maybe individually adjust the linear settings
inside this radius effect. So again, we will change does
just the link to the slider to linear with of course, this is our source. And then first of
all, let's start with the same settings. So it was 4050, 0 comma 100, making
sure that below 40, there won't be any
effect on our radios. Or let's say the radius
will be 0 and above 50, the radius will be 100. And everything
in-between will be linearly changed into the
interval from 0 to 100. Alright? So right now
it will look like this. Here. We won't have
any glow radius. And when the music really pops, the radius will be enlarged. Now let's play this to
see if we are happy so far with how the music
texts works out. Maybe we could even
increase the radius a little more when the
music really hits. So maybe we just
want to multiply this linear effect with
the factor of two. So let's just write
two times linear. Then, again the same expression. So now we have the radius
of 200 instead of 100. Of course, we could also sort of create the same effect when
writing 200 year at the end. But I just want to show you
that you can, of course, also multiply the linear
expression itself. And then maybe we also
want to change the color of the text by
making it a little brighter in these moments. So this can be done by
changing the threshold. Right here we have
a threshold of 60%. And if we bring this
threshold down, you'll see that the
text will get brighter. So how can we
achieve this effect? Well, all we've got
to do is modify our linear expression so that in these moments when
the music pumps out, the threshold will be
lowered in this case. So let's just start by again, Alt clicking on the
stopwatch here in the lower threshold to
create an expression. And then we could either
start by Pig weapon, our threshold again and
link it to the slider. Or what we can also do is
just copy this expression here and paste it
onto our threshold. First of all, we want to delete this factor two in this case. And then what we want to do
is if the slider is below 40, we want the threshold to be added standard
value, which is 60. And if the slider will be at 50, we want the threshold to be 0, which will in this case, ensure that our texts
will brighten up. This will create a negative
relation from 40 to 50. It will be transferred
to 60 to 0. And now we want to leave this expression and you'll
see that in this moment when the music texts pops out and our original value was above 40, the threshold will
change to 0 in this case because the value
seems to be above 50. So now we have the effect
that we wanted to create. The music itself will be
without a glow effect. And most of the time. But when there's a heavy
hit, first of all, the radius will be enlarged, and secondly, the
threshold will be lowered. And I think this
looks really nice and really focuses on those
heavy beat moments. Now let's play
this one more time and see what we've
created so far. So I'm really happy with
how this turned out. It looks like a
nice flesh effect in these moments of music hits. So all in all, I hope you understood how to use
the linear expression. It's a very nice and powerful
expression in my opinion, that gives you all the
possibilities to modify your expression to a desired
range of target values. And also with the possibility of extracting your audio
data to a null object. You can really
link any effect or any property to the music data. So that's it for this video. And in the next video, we want to animate the whole circle together with this text effect by letting it move a little
random and space and also creating a
rotation in time.
39. Part 5: Customizing the text content, Time and Wiggle Expression: Now, what I forgot to
mention in the end of the last segment was that
in this video, of course, we also want to change the text itself in those
heavy beat moments. So therefore, let's check one more time the
audio amplitude layer, maybe select the slider and
choose to view the graph. What we could do
is change music. Two is in this
moment my passion. So here we have those
hits you'll see, here we want to change
to is my passion. So for now, let's choose
this frame and time. Or maybe we'll start
one frame earlier. And what we want to do now, this is the moment where the
texts should still be music, and here it should be is. So we don't need any
expressions for that, but we will simply animate
the source texts by introducing keyframes to
the source of this text. So therefore, we want
to open our text here. And then we have
the text option, open that, and we
have the source text. So now we simply want to hit the stopwatch to create
our first keyframe. And now we have a keyframe
set at this moment. So at this moment, at, at any moment before the
texts will be music. And we continue in
the next frame. And we want to change
this text to is. Then leave it like this until the next hit arrives
in this moment. So here it should still be is we set another keyframe by clicking this
little symbol here. Making sure that in this
area the text will be, is now for the next frame, it should be my. And then we continue until
the next head, which is here. Here it should still be my. So set another keyframe. Move forward one frame and
change the text to passion. And we want to stick with passion for the
rest of the time. So let's play this one more time to see what we've created. I think this looks quite nice. Although of course
here at the end, we have another moment of high amplitude where the
text doesn't change anymore. So what you could do
there are of course, several ways and you could decide to create any
animation you like, but you could, for example, change the text to music
is my greatest passion. So that you have
a change in texts at every moment of
high amplitude. Or you maybe want to decide and delete the text here
in this last moment. And this also could be
done in several ways. For example, just create another keyframe for the
source texts at this moment, move forward one frame and time. Just click into that text
and delete the text. Or what you could also do
is just let this layer, and in this moment, of course then also
the text would disappear at this
very moment in time. But for now, I think
we are okay with how the animation looks and what we want to do for the last
part of this video to music project example is that we want to move this
whole scene that we see here. So the circles together
with the text, we want to introduce a random movement as well as
a general rotation in time. And therefore, we will
first of all create another composition which will
be the final composition. Then we want to import this audio composition into
that final composition and play around with some of these settings off the
audio composition. So let's go ahead and
create a new composition. And now what we see is that
the suggestion from After Effects for the
duration will again be three minutes and 1 second. Therefore, I want to
cancel this for a second. And see that here we have concentrated to work
inside this work area. And we don't want to focus
on the whole three minutes. So what we can do for the
audio composition is just right-click this
work area and then trim our composition
to this work area. And now, instead of
creating a new composition, what we can do is choose
our project data and simply select this audio
composition which has now been trimmed
to our work area. And then just drag
this composition into a new composition. Rename this new audio to composition by hitting Enter
and just write final comp. And now we have already imported the audio
composition into that final composition
and we can continue to work in that
final composition now. So first of all, I set that we want to
introduce a random movement as well as a general rotation
of this audio composition. The thing now is if we
have a random movement of this audio composition and say, We will go down a little
bit in whitespace, that it will look a little
awkward here because it gets cut off on top
of that composition. Now of course, we want to
see all those hits here and have the whole We'll
included in this movement. So therefore, we
need to adjust a little bit the
audio composition. So let's one more time
open this composition. And now we want to get a
little bit more space here. So what we can do is simply open our composition settings and then switch the
preset from full HD. We need a little more
width as well as heat. So therefore, maybe
what we can do is stay with 25
frames per second, but just choose four K hit. Okay? And then what we can see is now we have more
space here at the sides. But still our wheel gets
cut off here on top. And this is because the layer itself still is
created in full HD. So the layer ends here
at this position. Now, you might think
that what we can do is just select this layer and then change our solid settings
to make them calm size. And therefore now we
also are working in for k with this layer, then it knew. But now you can see that also the mask has
been scaled up, not only the layer, but also the mask and therefore the whole
view is changed. Or better said, if I now also increase the size of weird
too as well as we have three, we again have the same
problem that we started with. And then those hits here again, we'll leave our space
of the composition. So how can we solve
this problem? What we need to do is
get our mask out of the way before adapting
the size of that layer. One more time, I'm going
to undo what I did last. So then again, I have
my weird one layer in full HD while the whole
composition is for k. And now I'll open up
my mask by hitting M. And then I want to cut this
mask for a second, control X. And now I can change
the solid settings, make this solid column size. Select the layer again, Control V to paste
the mask again. You'll see that now the mask
has the same size as before. But what we need to
do again, of course, is open our audio
spectrum effect and choose the path again
to be the mask one. Now you can see that here
we are again with our mask. And the hit here is displayed
as we'd like it to. Now, we will do the very
same for our second. We'll just cut this mask, open the solid settings, make it Comp Size, paste the mask Control V, open our audio spectrum effect. And again choose the
mask one to be the path. And then you'll see
here at the top that it is fully displayed
as we'd like it to be. Now, we don't need to do that for the wheel three
because in this case, our layer is of
course still full HD, but the effect is applied
only to the center. So this will be an inside we are which then of
course we'll never leave this layer here at
the site or at the top. So now we have
created the effect. We want to end. All moments. Also in this very
hard hit moments will see that the music is fully displayed as
we want it to be. Now coming back to
our final comp, we can then move this
composition in space. And before we start to do so, of course now we are working in full HD here in
this final column, while the audio composition
has been changed to four k. So what we wanna do is
just scale it down the shortcut S to open the scale
and scale this to 50%. And now we can just let this, we'll move around in space. And it never gets
Cartier at any position. But before doing so, let's just quickly align this again to perfectly
match our composition. And now maybe we can start
with rotating this wheel. Therefore, I want to use another expression and we open the rotation
with shortcut R. And now what we want to do
is Alt click the stopwatch. And I want to write something
like time. Multiply it. By the value of 40. Then you will see that this
wheel starts to rotate. And this is because of
the time expression. Now to better explain how
this time expression works, I quickly want to add the
text to this composition. So just use the text tool and click inside our preview area. And then we just close our texts without
writing anything. So we have created
this empty text layer. We want to open this, open our text and then add an expression
to our source texts. So again, Alt click
this source text, and then we want to
change this to time. So what we see now is the value of the time expression
at this very moment. And if we then change
the time indicator, then you'll see that the
time expression is moving. And it just shows the point in time where we currently are
inside our composition. So here of course, this is
the moment 01 second later we are at time value 12 seconds
later, time value2, etc. Now what you can see here
inside this composition is that currently are starting timestamp
is at about six seconds, while the end is about 11
seconds and some frames. And this is because
we have shrunken the previous composition to
fit our previous work area. And that work area started
at the 6 second mark. And therefore this is our
current start time stamp here in the final column, as well as also in the
audio composition. Because remember, in that
composition we started to trim our composition
to that work area. But again, of course,
we can just change this start value by opening our composition
settings and changing the start time code to be 0. Then of course the
values you see here. So for example, three
seconds be the very same f, our time value from
that expression. So this value is of course
changing at any frame. And we want to use this value to create our rotation of this
audio composition. Now, the rotation
would be very slow if we just use the time value. And therefore, what
I've done is just edit this factor of 40 to make
it rotate a little faster. But still I think the
rotation is too slow. Therefore, I want to change
this factor here, 280. And then we have created this
nice rotation of our music. We'll now I can delete
this text layer. And next we want to also
add a sort of random, random movement in x and y space to give this one
a little more dynamic. So therefore, we can use
another expression which will be used to modify our position. So we can hit P to
open the position. Or remember, you can also hit Shift to open several
properties like for example, our Shift P to open our
position and rotation data. Now again we create
an expression, Alt click the stopwatch. And now we want
to write, wiggle. Open the brackets,
three comma 100. Close this expression. And you'll see that the
part from the rotation, we have added soul of a random
movement in x and y space. And this is done by
the wiggle rotation, by the wiggle expression, which in my opinion is a very powerful expression
that can be used in many, many projects and
compositions and always adds a nice effect to your desired
layers or compositions. Now the two parameters inside this wiggle expression
simply determine how many times we
want to wiggle per second and be the
extent of that wiggle. So in this case, we want
to wiggle three times per second by an amount of
100 pixels in x and y. Together with the rotation, I think this music
we'll now looks really nice with a cool
dynamic in time. And let's see one more
time what we finally created in this project example. Of course, again, you could do many, many more adjustments. Like for example, take this
audio composition here, duplicate it, then open the
scale as well as the opacity. Maybe scale this one
up to 150 per cent while bringing down the
opacity to 20 per cent. To have another we'll
hear in the background, or you may be duplicated
the first real, to have another wheel here on the right side and one more
We'll here on the left side. Of course, this is your
individual choice on how you like to have your video
move to the music. But for this segment, we got to know how
to use expressions. You already know the
linear expression, which allows you to change an origin range of values
to a desired target range. You know how to use the
wiggle expression to make, for example, random
movements in x and y. And you also know how to use the time
expression to create, for example, this never ending rotation of our music wheel. So that's it for this segment. I hope you liked it. How this music we'll turned out and let's see again
in the next video.
40. Using a Greenscreen to go on vacation from home: For the upcoming segments, I'm welcoming you directly
here from the Caribbean, whether it's using a scrape. And so part of the cocktails
and I think together we can easily fix the next
video is right from here. So what we're going to talk
about in the next segment will be just kidding, Although I wish it was true. But what we're going
to talk about in the upcoming videos
will be first of all, on how to use such
a green screen in order to, for example, place yourself into
a different setting that I'm going to show you
another method that even allows us to place objects into different scenery without
using such a green screen. And at the end, we are going to create an interview
with ourselves. We are going to appear two
times in the same setting. So I'm going to get changed now and then we'll see
again in After Effects. Alright, Now first of all, I am deeply sorry for this, really desperate
to try to create a little vacation mode
inside this course. But I felt like this might be a good example video for the upcoming effect that
this video is all about, and that is the so-called
key light effect. Now, looking at
this composition, what you can see is that at the bottom we have
the sandy beach, a video which is this Caribbean beach
here in the background. Then we also have a
Caribbean music included. And on top of that, we have
to green-screen layers. Those layers, of course, meet the stock video. And then we have applied
different effects that I will talk about
in a couple of minutes. I will also explain why I added two layers for this
green screen video. But for now, let's just begin with the
original stock video. And I will activate this layer. And you'll see that this is
just me standing in front of the green screen in my
living room downstairs. Now, first of all, of course, later on, when the killer
effects be applied, we will get rid of all
those green areas here. But before doing so, what we need to do is of course, take a mask and just cut this stock video here to
the green screen area. We do so by picking the pen tool and then starting
here at the left, bottom. And just drawing a rough shape to only include our
green-screen areas. So there we are. And now we can really focus
on the key light effect. Now what you can see
before doing source, that the lighting
is not perfect. So we have a little
light green area here at the top and we get to darker
areas here at the bottom. Nonetheless, we can
make this effect work and we start by
simply applying it, choose Effect,
keying, key light. And now let's talk about the different settings and
properties of this effect. The most important
one, of course, is the screen color. And we want to choose
the picker tool and just let go here
on our green area. And now I want to delete
those green-screen to and green-screen three layers where the effect has already been applied and we will really start from scratch with this video. Now what you can see is that
the effect has been applied. So those green areas here
at the top look quite good. But here at the bottom,
as I already mentioned, in those darker areas, it doesn't yet look
really perfect. So let's talk about
some more settings. Here. You can open
up this screen met. And there you can either
increase the Clip Black value to include more and more of those darker areas to
our key light effect. Or on the other hand, you could decrease the clip
white value so that more and more of those areas will be left over after
playing this effect. So if I decrease this
clip white value, what you'll notice is
that more and more of the darker areas will still be there after the
effect has been applied. While if increase the
Clip Black value, more and more of those
areas will be cut out. And that of course,
is what we want to start with because we
want to get rid of this darker bottom areas
here in the picture. So therefore will increase this clip black value until
all those areas disappear. And if we further increase it, what you'll notice
is that parts of my shirt also starts
to disappear. So let's find a value where the bottom areas are
perfectly left out. Why my shirt still looks good, should be about here. And now we can decrease the clip wide value to make my shirt look a little better. And the more I decrease it, you'll notice that
certain areas here at the bottom start
to appear again. So let's just find
a perfect value. Increase this clip
black a little more, decrease the clip wide. And what you cannot do
is decreased this clip wide further than you have increased the
Clip Black value. Because if you do so, the frame will be inverted
and that of course, is not what we want to achieve. Okay? And then we have some
more options here. Like for example, we could
shrink or grow the whole mask. And if I increase this
value, you'll notice that A border around myself starts to appear while decreasing
this value below 0 will make myself a little
thinner than I am in nature. So therefore, let's just
state with the value 0 here. You could also apply a little softness right
now as you can see, the mosque year, the
borders are really hard. If I increase the softness, then as the name already says, of course, the borders here, We'll start to be a
little more soft. But as the background
is very, very sharp, I also want myself and the
edges to be quite sharp. So therefore, maybe we'll just choose a very small
value, such as 0.2. And that's it about the most important
settings for this effect. We have some more
advanced settings here. But most of the
cases you should be okay with what I
mentioned before. So let's just focus
on those settings. But if I want to
consider my pens, maybe focus a little
bit on this area, then you'll see that
maybe we want to shrink the screen a
little bit more here. So therefore, what we'll do
is come down to the screen, shrink and maybe
choose minus one. And this looks a lot better
for depends here whatsoever. We have some areas here
in the cocktail where now the keying effect has been applied and of
course should not be applied. So that's the little
trick I used before. If I have a little lighter
area here at the top, while a little darker area for the lighting
here at the bottoms. What you can easily do
is either of course, play around with
all those settings until you find a perfect match. Or as I always do, I apply another mask
on this layer here. So let's just choose
the rectangle tool and focus on our top. Maybe until here. And now we don't want
this mask to be added. But what we want to do is we
want to intersect our masks. So therefore, we will only apply the mask here in this upper area where really
both masks have been placed. And then we want to duplicate this layer and open
up the mask settings. And for this time, we don't want to
intersect the masks, but we want really to
subtract our second mask. Now, this layer really focuses
only on the bottom area, while the other layer
focuses on the top layer. So we have already applied the effect perfectly
for the bottom area. So for this one, and now let's focus
on our top layer and try to bring our cocktail
back in the game. So therefore, we want to
decrease the blacks a little more like this and then also
decrease the clip wide. We don't have to focus on those areas here
like we did before because there's of course
as part of the other layer. So now we can really focus on the top layer here so that the cocktail,
we'll be back in the game. And I think like this, it looks quite good for both the shirt as
well as the pants. Now what I also did was
apply some color settings, some color effects so that
it matches a little better. The background. What I notice here is that we
have some black areas left. So we come down to
this layer here again, open up the screen mat and
increase the clip black. Until this area disappears. Should be good like this. Maybe increased clip wide, a little more,
increased Clip Black. This is the advantage of really cutting those layers
into pieces because now you can just really
focus on the dark areas and improve those without having an impact on what we did here. For my face as well as my shirt. Now, I already
mentioned I applied some color settings
and colored effects. So let's just open up
our top and choose Effect Color Correction and maybe start with
increasing the saturation. So apply hue and saturation. And now we want to increase
the saturation, maybe 220. And then we also want to apply
brightness and contrast. So open color correction,
brightness contrast, and then maybe increase
the contrast to ten. And make this one
a little darker. Minus ten. Decrease or increase the
contrast a little more to 20. And then of course, you
want to make sure that all the effects and
settings you apply to the one layer will be applied the same way
to the second layer. So just copy those. Hit Control C and come down to our second layer and hit
Control V to apply the effect. And there we are
standing right in the Caribbean with our
cocktail perfectly included. And I think this
looks quite good. So that's it for the
key light effect. If you have a green screen, this is my recommendation
for you to use. There are other
effects to apply. A key thing like, for example, if I delete
those effects again, we could also choose Effect
keying, linear color key, which will be more
simple effect so that less memory space is needed and it will be
rendered a lot faster. But anyways, there are not as many options and
settings to play around, and the final result won't be as good as with tequila effect. So here you can see we have some green areas
still include it. Of course, you could
play around with the tolerance as well as
the matching softness. But my recommendation, if you do own a green screen
or blue screen, would be to really use tequila
effect because this is a kind of intelligent
tool and allows you to create a good solution for yourself or any object standing in front of
the green screen. So that's it for this video. And then in next
video we'll talk about some other
options that can be applied to include objects and move them to
different settings, even without owning a
green or a blue screen. So see you for that
one in the next video.
41. The Roto Brush tool: Overview: In the next part, I want to show you
another method or another tool that allows
us to cut or key. For example, a person as
we see here in this video, without even having to
use a green screen. So as an example, we want to consider this video of a woman a
dancing at the beach. I will show you the
video right now. And the cool thing again is
that after cutting the woman, we have access to her as a
person in a very own layer. And therefore, we can, for example, give this one a
text here behind the person. Or even duplicating this layer with only the person so that we have a shadow effect
as we see here. And finally, create a
video like this one. So of course, again, the possibilities of
what you can do with this tool are sort of endless. The very nice thing is
that even the hair here, which is a very complicated
thing to cut or two key, looks very clean here
in front of our text. This is because the
tool that we use, the so-called Roto Brush Tool now is in its second version, which I can say is a lot, lot better than the first
version and really works. Very, very good. So of course, you can, again follow everything
we are going to cover in this part because the dancing video is part of the course material as
well as another video, which is this person
a break dancing. And this was the original video. This one. I will show you
quickly how it looked. And what I did for this
example was to just duplicate our person again by cutting it with the
so-called Roto Brush Tool. Then duplicating this
layer two more times, sort of modifying the color
of the pants and then again, putting another text
in the background, like in this case, breakdowns. So this is the final video. So there we are. We have our original person
duplicated two more times to the left and to the right with another text here
in the background. So what we're going to
do in the next video is focusing in detail on
this vacation video. And I'll explain to
you step-by-step how to use the Roto Brush Tool. And as you've learned
how to create this effect for
the dancing woman, you will be easily able to follow what we're going
to do for this video. It's sort of a repetition only. So therefore, we will cover in detail the vacation video and then do a quick summary
for this dance video. So let's get started
and therefore see you again in the next video.
42. The Roto Brush tool: First example in detail: So let's get started. We want to recreate
this vacation video, and therefore we will begin
with a new and empty project. And then start by
directly importing our two videos from
the course resources, which will be the example dance, as well as the example
of vacation video. Just direct drop them into our project files and then take the example
of vacation video, drag it into a new composition. Now this video is one minute
long, but in this case, as we just want to focus on how to use the Roto Brush Tool, which is a very useful tool, but also a demanding
one in terms of the usage of our GPU. And therefore, we will
just shrink this video maybe to the first
four or five seconds, either by just shrinking
only our work area and working inside this area or as we want to
do in this case, right-clicking this
work area and then choose trim comp to work area. So now our composition is
only four seconds long. And still we have a lot of movement here inside
these four seconds. So we can learn how to use the Roto Brush Tool just by concentrating on
these first seconds. So let's get into it and use this Roto Brush Tool you'll
see here at the top. And this tool is
used inside a layer. So right now we are in
decomposition of view. So what we want to do
is double-click onto our example vacation video
to open the layer view. And then we can apply the Roto Brush tool
and start drawing a rough shape here inside the person that we
want to be cut out. So what we can see here is the first proposal of this roto Brush tool
to define the edges. And now of course, we
want to further enhance these edges because
what this tool will do then in the second
version is use machine-learning algorithm to
track those edges in time. So it is very important that our first frame that
we want to use as a reference will be
quite good so that the tool will have some good
edges to follow in time. So of course, what
you can see here is that we have parts
of the sea included, that of course we don't want
to be part of our persons, so therefore, we can hit the
Alt or with your MacBook. I think it's the
Option button, leaf, this button pressed by
using your left mouse to change this one to a red pen and have
some parts excluded. And then again,
use the green pen to further enhance
these views here. And I think right now, we are already in
full resolution. That might be quite important because the better their
solution you will use, the more easy it will be for these tools to find the edges. So again, we want to
enhance this one here. Now, that was wrong, of course, we want it to be excluded. What you can also do is
hit the Control button, leaf this one pressed, and then click your
left mouse button and pull your mouse up or down to D or
increase the size of the circle that you want
to use for your pen. And now let's quickly
go around here and see where we can
further enhance our edges. I think in this part here we want our
fingers to be included. Okay? And then let's see here. Here, of course we want
this part to be excluded. So again, hit the Alt button, draw a rough shape there. This looks quite
good and here, okay, we want to decrease the size. And then again, have
this part included. Exclude this one.
Okay, this looks fine. Looks good as well. Maybe here we have a little
part of the C included, so let's de-select that part. Has already said the first frame you want to use
is very important because this will
be the reference to start the algorithm. And then again, machine-learning will be used so that
frame-by-frame, these edges will be followed. And we have a little special
case here with the hair, which is very
difficult to analyze. And therefore we have
another tool which will be the so-called
refined edges tool. And you can open this tool by using your left mouse button. Select that one,
leave it selected, and then choose the
Refine Edge tool. Now again, you have the same
objects like increasing or decreasing the circle size
with your control button. I think this size
should be fine. And now we want to
draw around our hair here that we want to give
this one special focus. And see that these edges
here are looking quite good. So what you can see here is our final teaching or final key objects
that we want to use. And also we can have
different views here, like for example, have in red the areas that we
don't want to be included. And what you can see here, the person that
will be included. Now of course, you could change the color of this
one, maybe two blue. But I've never done so. So let's just go back to red. Then we have the option
to view the Alpha. So the white part
will be included. We have here these
defined edges and here in the hair we have a
little bit of further details. So let's just get back
to our standard view, which is this one. And then here we have
some more options of these Roto Brush tool. First of all, we have the Roto Brush Options and
then we have the edge option. So the Edge is what we've
done here for the hair. And the Roto Brush is what we've used in all
the other segments. So if you would, for example, one to increase the feather, then you will see that these
edges becomes smoother. But in this case, of course, we want them to be very small, like for example five. Then you could also in or
decrease the contrast. Shift the edges to increase the object in
total, like you'll see here. But for now, we just wanted
to leave this for 0. And also the same
options could be applied here to the edge matte. But in this case, we are happy with
how this turns out. And what we want to do now
is check some other frames. Maybe we move forward here. Two or three frames. Let this tool do its job. We'll see what the
edges will look like after the fifth frame. And I think the edges
are still perfect. Maybe check one more time. Five or seven frames. To the other direction. These edges seem to
look quite good, which I can tell you really is a huge enhancement of
this second version. Because I was using
the first version for many, many years. And in this example, I'm quite sure that for example, here in this area where in some frames we will see
a little bit of the sea, while in other frames, the arm here is in
front of the sea. So they are, the
first version would have a lot of struggles
following these edges. But the second version seems
to work really, really well. So what we want
to do now here is just choose our work
area for this tool, which in this case will be shrunken to those four seconds. And now we want to
freeze those frames. And what this will do is start of the algorithm
to analyze those frames and freeze these
frames so that we can then work with this
effect as a single layer. This will take some time
because it's very demanding. And as I've already said, machine learning is used. So we need our GPU
to fix this one. And right now here we
are with 12 or 13%. So I'll just do a
quick break here and we'll see you again when
this tool has done its job. Alright, so we are done. And if we now duplicate
this example, a vacation, a video
layer Control D, and then get rid of our Roto Brush effect here
for the bottom layer. Then you'll see that here, of course, in the composition, all will still look
quite as before. But if we now add a
text like for example, vacation 2022, and then
maybe bring this text here. You'll see that if the texts
here is in second position behind our example vacation
with the applied Roto Brush. Then you will see that
this text layer is looking perfectly positioned
behind our dancing woman. And also, which I really
think is quite impressive, is how this hair here is
treated with this tool. It really looks very, very good here in these
difficult parts to analyze. But still we have the letter O, of course here included. Beside the hair and
here where the hair is, we have the person
in the foreground. So this looks really good. And what I've also done for the example video
was two more things. First of all, I duplicate it. These extracted layers
here for the woman. Therefore just Control D again. And then position this one
a little bit to the right. Makes sure that you don't move up so that the leg
will be cut here, but you could move a little darker and I'll just bring
it a little to the right. And then I decrease the
opacity T to open the opacity, decrease this to May 60% ring
a little more to the left, then again, duplicate
that layer. Choose the one on the bottom, bring it a little
more to the right. Decrease the opacity again
to maybe 35 per cent. And I think for the example, what I did was to bring up
the text to second position. So that will be before
those duplications. And now we have this
woman dancing in time here with two more duplications. I will render the
final results later on about one more
thing I also added, and that is to adjust the text to the shape and position of the horizon here
in the background. And I can do so by selecting our text layer and then
choosing the pen tool. And start with the first
here on the left side. Then add another point
here on the right side, lift the left mouse
button pressed, and now move up or down to bring in the curve
for this shape. Adjust this to our horizon, sort of like this. Then let go. And now if I open
this text layer, open the text options, go down to the path options. And for the path, select this first mask. Then you'll see that if the baseline shift
will not be so huge, bring this one down
to 0 that our texts really is adjusted to this mask which
follows the horizon. Now also, of course, I want
our text to be in the center, and I can do so by opening the paragraph options and
then choosing centered. Now we really have
the vacation texts here behind our dancing a woman. And also I think in our example, what I did was to do a little
color correction here. And in this case,
what I want to do is open the mode here and then switch this mode from
normal to overlay. Blend with the background. But also there are
many, many other modes that we'll cover later
on in this course. But I think the overlay option for this example
looks quite nice, better than the soft
light and better than the hard light screen. So let's just stick
with the overlay to blend this color
into the background. So let's check out what we finally created
for this example. I think this is looking really
good, although of course, we are not really able to
see the text vacation. So maybe what we can
do is click inside this text some more spaces here, maybe some spaces here on the right side to move the whole texts a
little to the left. And of course again,
the possibilities here are endless to
further enhance this. But I think for
demonstration purposes, this should look quite okay. We are done with
this first example. We have the woman dancing
in front of the text. And now let's
switch and consider our second example and add
some a break dance moves.
43. The Roto Brush tool: Second example in fast forward: Alright, so in this
case I want to use the roughen edges tool, not only for the
hair of the person, but also to follow along
the left and right-hand. Okay, So I'm satisfied with
the mask for the first frame. And now let's follow
along and teeth in time and see how this turns out. Well, that's what
I was expecting. This shoe is a lot harder to understand for
after effects than before for our dancing
vacation lady. So we need to put some work in to follow this one
along, but no problem. Again, we choose
the Roto Brush Tool and remark our shoes. Well, this shoe is
seems to be very hard to understand for
Adobe After Effects. That's a little bit
of a bad work to do. But still better
than as if you would have to mask this
person out by yourself. I think it's 90% less work, so you can manage to just
follow along this shoe. Alright, so it's
getting interesting here where the hand is now behind our body and also the hair is not
really visible anymore. So what we can do is get
rid of the refined edges. In this case, we
want to choose them. You find edges tool
again and then de-select your area with
putting the Alt or Option key, and then just
de-select this area. Of course, again,
reposition our shoes. So choose the Roto
Brush Tool again. Go along with our shoot. Now we've lost the
second shoe as well, so we need to rethink
that one too. And this of course
happened because the shoe was moving
here before our body. Then when leaving the body, it got a little lost, but now we find it again. And let's see how
this turns out. Alright, so I followed along for a little more than 1
second and this should be the end of my area before
just drag this end here, and then we want to
freeze those frames. Alright, so we are done. And first of all, let's
duplicate this example dense layer by hitting Control
D. And then of course, for the layer at the bottom, we want to deactivate or delete our Roto Brush Effect and then get back
to the composition. And you'll see nothing
really has changed so far, but we're going to add a text. And we want to write
something like break dance. Maybe choose a little
better font here, something like this, which
is looking like graffiti. And then increase that one. And for the color, we want to pick the color maybe from the pants
here, so an orange. And then we want to rotate it so that it fits the bottom here. So open R to bring
up the rotation and then maybe decrease this for, let's say maybe 2.5
minus 2.5 degrees. Bring it up a little bit so that it's directly
behind our densa. And what I also did, of course, was to duplicate those layers here with the Roto
Brush effects. So just hit Control D again. Bring it up to the right. Make sure that our
dancer is still here, dancing on the
bottom like there. And then I changed the
color for the parents. And I did so by choosing Effect, Color Correction,
change to color. And what we wanna do is
for the front color, we want to, of course, choose the pen color and then maybe bring it to something
like a greenish tone. And now we see
that some parts of our hands and arms
have also changed, so we need to decrease the tolerance here the hue has been chosen to be five per cent. Lightness tolerance
is 50 per cent and saturation
tolerant tolerance as well, 50 per cent. So let's bring those
two values down. Maybe both to five per cent. And you'll see that
now our arms are back in the tone they
have been before, and we have a little
orange border here, but I think this looks quite nice so we can
leave it as it is, and then duplicate
that layer again. Bring it to the left and change the final color to
something like a blue one. This looks quite nice. So now let's see our
final composition, our final project
that we've made out of this dancing person. Alright, so there we
are now three dances in front of this gray wall
with the breakdowns slogan. I feel this is a
cool enhancement in comparison to our original video with only one denser here. Of course, in this case, we needed to put
in some more work, which is because the
object, first of all, is hardly separable
from the background, especially the shoes here. And of course, secondly, the movement of the
dancer is pretty fast. Now, feel free to play
this out for yourself. Of course, you have
the course material with this video included, and now that's it
for this tutorial. And in the next video, what we wanna do to end this section is create an
interview with ourselves. So see you for that
one in the next video.
44. Set up an interview with yourself: In this very last
segment of the section, we want to be doing
some fun stuff and create an interview
with our self, as you can see here. But before I dive into
that and explain to you step-by-step how such an
interview can be created. Let's just check out
the final video. Before we get started
with the interview, Let's quickly check what can be achieved by good lighting. And now let's welcome
our special guests. Hello, and thanks for having me. You're welcome. Today. It's all about your new
Adobe After Effects course. Well, my course, your
course, either way, I would be more than happy for any five-star rating
or recommendation. I'm sure the audience
will check it out. And now let's get back
to the main office. Where first of all, I hope you listen to those two
guys you can see here and give the course of five-star rating if you like it. And now let's get back
to After Effects. And to be honest, creating such an interview
is very, very easy, especially if you decide to not physically interact between, let's say, person a here on the right and person
B on the left. Then you just have to make
sure that first of all, the cameras setting
will be the exact same as your firm for person a. And later on, of course, you'll formatted for person B, then you can just intersect
those two frames. Here on the left is what
you see from person B, and here on the right is
what you see from person a. And secondly, of course, you need to make
sure that you are independent of changing
circumstances, such as, for example, wind or a changing
lighting you have outside. So better film this one inside your home where you really have the exact same frame here on
the left as on the right, so that you will never see those intersecting areas
here in the middle. And later on, of course, in this case, we also
added a fist bump, which needed a little
preparation because I had a little point here where those fists needed to meet. But to be honest, this didn't
really work out perfectly, so I needed to fix that in post. What I also needed to fix
what's the pause times? Of course, I knew at any point the whole interview was
scripted when I ask a question as Person a and knew
the exact answer from person B and spoke the
answer in my head, trying to recreate
the past times until the next question
came from person a. But honestly, I underestimated the pause
times apparently in my head, I spoke at it a little too fast, and therefore we also need
to fix that one impulse, but I show it to you in a
second how this can be done. So let's get started
in After Effects, and I'll explain to
you step-by-step how such an interview
can be created. Okay, so first of all, I think in this case, the most efficient way for you to understand this
would be that we just stay inside this project
and I'll explain to you the most important steps. Like, for example, matching
the pause times of Person B to the speaking
times of person a. And secondly, of course, to understand how the
fist bumps can match. Now here on the left we have
the part for interview, as well as interview. And interview 0 is the name for anything that happens
before the light switch. So let's just start
with interview a. Do a new composition
out of that. Maybe also import interview
B as well as interview 0. So for interviews
0 here at the top, you can see of course, that this is all that happens
before the lighting switch. And I guess this is really very easy to understand
because I just waited for the moment where I want the change to happen
which would be here. And in this moment is where
we want to interview 02. And so we just grab it here and take interview a
move forward one frame. And then match this with
the exact same moment. And you'll see here, this is how the lighting
switch was created. So this is just a
timing question. And now the more important and a little
more difficult part would be to match interview
with interview B. Now therefore, let's just open the audio settings
from interview a, meaning the person
here on the right. Open the audio settings and
especially the waveform. And do the same for interview, be composition, meaning
the person on the left. Open the waveform and maybe get a little more space here so that we can see a little better. Now of course, what you see
here on top for interview, especially here, for example, is the speaking time from interview person
a on the right, and here is the
speaking time from interview person B on the left. And now of course we
need to match this. This is where person a says, let's welcome our special guest. And here, interview B says. Hello, Nice to be here or
something similar like that. So first of all, we
need to bring this to the right to match the pause
time here from interview a. And then we could just
bring the beginning of our work area to this point with hitting,
hitting the shortcut B. And here we could ended with
hitting N. And then just, let's check out the audio
by only hitting comma. Now, let's welcome
our special guests. Hello, and thanks for having
me know work on today. It's all about your new
Adobe After Effects. Well, okay, we need to bring this one a little
more to the left. Play this one more
time with comma. Now, let's welcome
our special guest. Hello, and thanks for having me. You're welcome. Today. It's all about your new
Adobe After Effects. Well, my course, you're okay. So the first one here
seems to be fine. This is the introduction. Then interview person B
says, Nice to be here. Then comes the first
question from interview a. And now here we see
the first problem, which is that this pause time, we trained the first
one from interview B and the second one is too short. So what can we do in this case? Now, of course, we need to bring up a
little more time here in this interview
person B, composition. But we cannot do so in the times where interview
person B is speaking, of course, because
it would be very visible and also hear a bell. But what we can do is if it's not too much of space
we need to get, then we just grab the pause time here from interview person B, where basically nothing happens
and we can just bring up a little more time by slowing
down the composition. Now before doing so, let's just quickly
create a mask here for interview so that we see
both at the same time. And we just want to
start very basic by just bringing
up the mask here. And now you'll see that interview person B or
B is starting to appear. Now we don't want to consider
the fist bump at first. We just want to arrange the clips so that they
match in terms of audio. Now, before doing so, let's just open the
mask by hitting M and M again to open the mask options. And now we want to bring
up a little feather because right now
I think we still, okay, You can see
it a little bit. So just enlarge the
feather to maybe 50. Or even, let's say 80. So that now you really
cannot see where this picture from person B is changing into
the one of person a. Maybe bring this up a little
more to 120. Okay, Perfect. Now back to matching the audio. So we have already
seen that if I reopen the audio
here for person a, we have already seen that the
first one seems to be fine, but what we need to do now is consider the pause time here
from interview person a B, and give us a little more time. So what we need to do is just mark this composition
from interview B and hit Control Shift D to just
cut it at this position, then move forward a
little more in time. Here is already the moment where interview person B has
begun to speak again. Open the audio settings for
this new composition as well. And here I think we
can make another cut. So again, Control Shift D. And now just take this
pause time here, right-click and choose
time. Time stretch. And now we want to
bring up effector like maybe 115%. Click Okay. And you'll see that from
this point to the end of that composition is what we have just one in terms of time. So now we can bring up
this composition here. So the first frame from that
composition should match the last frame from
the composition below. So let's just zoom in
a little more there. But it seems to be fine. And we'll open up the
audio for this one. Bring up the waveform
again and you'll see that still there's
not enough time. So this was very bad, badly done by myself. But of course, we can fix
this with a time stretch. Of course would be
better to not use anytime stretch and just have the perfect
matching interview. But I just wanted to
show it to you because it once again explains that you'll have a
problem and you need to solve in After Effects and you'll find your way
to the solution. So maybe let's, let's do 130. And bring the composition
more to the right here. And let's just hear if we need to bring even
more space or if it's okay. So we hit comma again
After Effects course. Well, my course, your course. Now, let's welcome
our special guest. Hello, and thanks for
having me. You're welcome. Today. It's all about your new
Adobe After Effects course. Well, my course, your course. Now that sounds quite nice. And this is the very
same method applied to any other pause times
between interview a and interview person B
where it did not match. So in those cases, just grab that composition
or that layer here, go to the beginning of a pause. Had control shift D
to split that layer, go to the end of the paws, hit Control Shift D again, and then grab the pause
layer and stretch the time. Now you can increase the time
factor by 20 or even 2530%. But I'd say there
is a maximum value. If you need to double
your time of a parse, Then sad but true, I'd recommend you
to do the interview one more time because you
will be noticing that when, for example, blinking
your eye or even doing any other small movements. But alright, we have timed
our interview now perfectly. And now I want to show to you two more things in the
final composition. So that's open that one up and then go inside a and B here, interview 0, as I've
already mentioned, is just the timing for
the lighting switch. And then we have an
adjustment layer to even have some
better lighting. If I turn that one on,
you'll see that I changed the light some more afterwards. But the important
steps are happening here inside the a
and B composition. And now first of all, how did they introduce Person B? Let's just check this out. And you'll see that here. He's jumping in. Now. The jumping is what I did originally in the interview, so that was not
created afterwards. I was just jumping
into the picture. And then what I did was
increasing the opacity. As we can see here, we have the interview be
layer then hit U to open any layers or any
effects with keyframes. And in that case it
is the opacity layer. So here we're going from 0, of course, to 100 per
cent for that layer. And then of course
for the fist bump, we get some problems because
we have a mask here, but of course, there will be a problem when the
fists need to match. As we can see here. There are the fists and
of course S here on that layer there is a mask
with some feathering, will see that the hand
starts to disappear. Because of that, I
created another layer or another composition which
is the interview a hand. And if we bring this one up, you'll see that
the hand gets back in place and this layer, or this composition is laying on top of any
other layers so that the mask does not have
any effect of that layer. What did I do in this interview? A hand composition. Let's just open it up. And what you'll
see here should be no surprise as the name
of the composition is already telling you it is just the hand interview person. A leftover by using the Roto Brush
effect that you've already gotten to
know in this section. And then of course,
I only focused on the important frames beginning on this moment where the hand is intersecting with the mask. And then until the hand
is back behind our mask. And we can just focus on the normal interview a and
interview B compositions. So back to our a
and B composition. And seeing here the fist bumps. What I also added was another
mask for this interview, a hand because I didn't want to really have the whole hand
above the other hand, but I wanted to create
an effect as if they were really meeting and
matching at this very moment. Of course, again, you need
to have a good timing, especially if you have
audio and the fist bumps. You can also, of course, not time stretch the moment where those fist bumps
me because he will notice if you are really bumping out your fist and you will just
slow that one down. It will also be noticeable
and that's why I would suggest you to really have the fist bump at
the very beginning, maybe be before Person
B is speaking at all. So then you have a
little more freedom. Just adjust the
fist bump in time. So this is how the whole
Seth interview was created. We have our person be
jumping in the picture. We have a fist bump. And of course we
have the person a and B doing an
interview all together. And at the very end, what we also did was just
adding some more lighting. I hope this section was
a little fun for you. You could learn some things. And that's the end of the
section and we'll see again in the next video.
45. Introduction to Mode and Moving Mask as Structural Elements: In the upcoming parts, I want to teach you about
different filling methods as well as blending modes inside
of Adobe After Effects. Now for this part, we want
to focus on image editing. And again, of course,
learn by having a look at specific
project examples. Now the first example will be the creation of such
a t-shirt design, in this case, a
Bitcoin to the moon. And what we want to
especially learn is on how to add such a texture here
to the text elements, but also to the images here to have this one a
little more structured. So that at the end, you might be the next T-shirt
designer and even upload your own designs on platforms
such as emerged by Amazon. Now, first of all, a
little disclaimer. I know that after
effects would not be your first choice if you'd
focus on image editing. But still, if you want to consider After Effects as
an all-round solution, I want to show you on how
you could even create such cool images inside
of Adobe After Effects. So for the next two videos, we want to cover on how to create this cool T-shirt design. And at the end of this section, I will also show you
on how I created my course image for this
Adobe After Effects course, completely inside of
Adobe After Effects. So let's waste no more
time and get started.
46. Fill methods and their function: Alright, so the goal of this section is that you
will get to know and understand how to use the different blending
modes you'll see here. And we will also cover
and take a look at the track matte that you'll
find in this column. Maybe the best way
to get started is to just grab our texture that you'll of course also find in the course material and
create a new composition. Now, maybe to get to know the
different blending modes, what we also want to
add is a new solid. So choose Layer, New Solid. And then we'll make this
one maybe a light blue, maybe something like this. Sure that income size
and click, Okay. Now what you'll see
here, of course, is only our new created solid
year for this composition. Now we could either lower the opacity to bring in
place our texture as well. Or what we could also do is use these blending modes here. So bring back the opacity to 100% and now open up
those blending modes. And here we have a lot of
different modes to choose from, which are separated into
different categories. Now here the first category, these are the subtractive modes, and here we have
the additive ones. And then later on we have some more complex
methods to use. So maybe we start by just click on, for example, multiply. And what you'll see here
is that our solid now interacts with the texture
below in a way that the solid, the solid is multiplied
with the texture itself. Now, my advice here are my tip would be that you
just browse through these different
categories as well as the different modes
themselves and check out their
effects for yourself. I couldn't Now click and we'll, we'll have a look at all
these different modes. But I think in this case, we'll just browse
through some of them. So multiply is part of the subtractive
category and you'll see that the solid itself
gets a darkened. The same applies here
for Linear Burn and all the other methods here
inside this category. Now, if we want to add this, then you'll see that the
color of the new created solid is added and interacted
with d below texture. The same applies for screen. So all of these modes basically create a
more light image, and all of these ones here
basically darken your image. Then as already said, we have some more complex ones here. For example, overlay
or hard light. Soft light. So again, just browse through them. You have the texture
for yourself and you can create some
very cool stuff. So let's do so by, for example, choosing,
multiply it for this one. And what I'd also
like to do in most of the cases is just
a mock or texture, choose Effect, color correction, brightness and contrast, and now further enhance the
contrast of this one. Maybe even 200. And then play around
with the brightness. Maybe make this one
a little darker. Then if we want to maybe make this one a
cinematic poster, we could even add a text and write something
like, for example, let's say the wall makes sure that this text here is on top of all
the other layers. Make it maybe a little
larger, even 250. Arial Black Sons goods, make sure it's centered. And now we also want to let this text interacts
with the layers below. So we wanted to choose
a blending mode for that one as well. And what could we choose? Maybe something like Vivid
Light and then change the text color to a
little darker so that it allows the below
layers to interact. Maybe something like a light blue or even some greenish that are here
in the blue area. Alright, so this looks good. And then we could also add a glow effect
to that text layer. So I'll choose
Effect stylize glow. This is a lot too bright, so bring down the
glow intensity, bring up the radius, and then also increase
the threshold. This looks pretty good. Let's finish off with
another text and maybe write something like now in theaters. Changed the font of
that one to maybe rage. Rage makes sure that
it's not all caps. Bring it up and decrease the font size
to something like 150. Pull it right below
our, the wall. And then I'd say we have created this nice cinematic poster
in just about five minutes. Now what you could
also of course, add something like
a vignette here. Makes sure to then select the solid as well
as the texture, creates a new pre-composition
out of those two pre-comp, one should be okay. For that precomp, we want
to select our masks here. Click queue until you fit the elliptical one and start
in the upper left corner, go down to the bottom right. Let go and then open our
mask options by hitting M, M and increase the feather. And there we are. This is the very next big blockbuster in cinema and
theaters coming soon. So that's it for you. You've gotten to know how
to use the blending modes. As already said, feel
free to play around with those different modes. You have the texture in
the course materials. And next in line, we want to create our Bitcoin
T-shirt design.
47. Practical example: Bitcoin Tshirt design: Heaven, our knowledge from
the last video in mind and especially what we learned about different blending modes. Let's now try and really recreate this Bitcoin
shirt design. In this case, we want to start and simply grab our Bitcoin, a JPEG file that
you'll of course, also find in the
course materials and create a new composition. Now, the black area
you will see here in our composition is now really part of the
Bitcoin JPEG image. And that's of course not what we want S in the final place. We really want this
designed to be printed on a blue shirt, maybe on a dark gray shirt, but of course also
on a black shirt. So we want this area
here to be transparent. Right now as we toggle
this switch on, you'll see that it's
not transparent. I can also show you
that by creating a new solid and maybe make it red. And then you'll see if we put this solid into second place, that here this black area really is part of
the Bitcoin image. Now, what we could do is choose a different
blending mode for this, uh, bitcoin image and
maybe switch to a Luma. Now, what this will do is
the lighter our Bitcoin, a JPEG image file is
in current places. More of the red solid
will be left through. Here at the sites we
had the black area, and therefore, the final
result will be black as well. And if I now create another
solid and make it maybe blue, then you'll notice that
still those areas here at the side are not transparent
as we would like it to be. So therefore, what
we want to do is not choose a blending mode
in luma for this one. So come back to normal. But we want to activate a track matte here
for this red solid. And therefore open
up this one and choose luma matte Bitcoin jpeg. Now what this will do is really what we want
to achieve, meaning. We will only let
those areas through where our Bitcoin coin
is really visible. And here at the side where
we had the black area, we want is we want this
to be transparent. So if I now turn off the blue solid and target on the switch, then you will see that here. We really will print this
in transparent as desired. So now let's continue and switch this solid to a color that
we'd like our image to be. And therefore open up the layer solid settings and make it sort
of a mood color, maybe like a light
blue, grayish one. Sort of like this. Hit OK and OK again. So this will be our
first composition for the Bitcoin image, and we now want to use this composition in the
final short design. So therefore, let's
create a new composition. But before I do so, I quickly delete the blue solid here as we don't
need it anymore. And now open composition, new composition or use
the shortcut Control M. And we will name
this one shirt and make it 4,500 by
5,400, which is a lot. But this is the preset
that, for example, merged by Amazon wants you to use if you want to
upload a short design. So we want to choose
that one hit, okay? And now we want to start and import our
Bitcoin composition. Now what I did, we want to
create Bitcoin to the moon. So therefore, we want to
duplicate this composition here, the Bitcoin to hit Control D and bring this
one a little to the left. And also then I added two texts, one for the letter M. And we want it to be Arial. Black sounds good, but
of course, a lot larger, like 350, or maybe
make it even 400. And then we want this first Bitcoin to
be a little smaller, so maybe bring it down
to scale off 70%. And for the second one, open up the scale and
make it maybe like 90%. And then we want
to also of course, change the color of this letter. So use the eyedropper. Click on the B here
from the Bitcoin. And now what we can do is
duplicate this letter again, hit Control D, right? Letter N. Bring it a
little to the right. And of course make
it a lot larger as this should be
the smallest one. And then we want to get larger
until this letter n here. So maybe make it 1200. Looking good. And now we want to rotate those letters as well
as the coins here. So starting by this m, we want to bring in
a heavy rotation. So open R to bring up the rotation and maybe
rotated to the left. Something like 60 to 70 degrees. Then open up this Bitcoin
here, are again rotated. Maybe something like 50
or 40, let's say 40. And then bring up the
rotation for that one year. Rotated a little less, let's say minus 20. And now the n here bring up the rotation and rotate
it just a little bit. Maybe ten degrees. And now let's place it. So that is looking
a little better. And we can really
read the word moon. Ring up this one a
little more down here, and now grab the letter M. Alright, so this looks
good. Right now. We don't have to worry
if this is centered, we will position all
those letters later on. So we want to make sure that the M is on top and the
n is at the bottom. And then of course we
want this one to be above the second
coin, as we see here. This looks good so far. And then of course, what
we also need to add is Bitcoin to the, to finish our slogan, Bitcoin to the moon. So therefore, we will write
this as a text of course. And BTC to the we don't want we want
to get in any trouble. I'm not quite sure if you
could use the word Bitcoin. So therefore, we
just better, right, BTC if you want to
upload this finally, too much by Amazon
and make tons of money to all those
Bitcoin believers. So therefore, in this case, we want to choose
a different font, maybe something
like this one here. Make it regular. And now we want to also
include small letters. This looks good. Make it of course a
lot, lot smaller. Something like 400 maybe. Okay. Now what we want to add is a gift those letters
a little more space. So therefore will open up the tracking and
increase that one. Maybe to even a 100. Okay? And of course we want
to position this as a mask, so therefore we'll
grab the pen tool. Start here. Create our first. Let go here for the second. And then with your
left mouse pressed, we go to the side here
to sort of recreate the moon curve and then let go. And now we want to
open the text options here, Text Path Options. And then we want to
choose our mask, one that we just created. Now in this case, of course, we want the text to be centered. So therefore, choose this
one here to be centered. And then what we could do, We don't want our text
to be below this mass. Therefore, we'll open
up the baseline shift, which is now at
minus 322 pixels. We want to bring this one up. So there's really along our
line that we just created. Maybe make it just
like minus 50. Okay, that's a little too high. So therefore minus 100. And then maybe bring up
our point here like that. And maybe bring this,
or give this one even more curvy, curvy pixels. So this is looking quite good and bring this one a
little more down here. There we are. This is close to
our final design. And now what's missing is the structure that we want
to add with a texture. So therefore, we will leave this composition and
create another one, which then will really be
our final composition. And therefore, we want to
name this one. Final comp. Stay with the settings
to be able to upload on Merge by
Amazon, then hit Okay. And now we want to import our short composition
that we just created. So just drag that one. And then of course,
we want to add our texture from the
course materials. Plays it here. And then, first of all, we want to position our shirt. So bring the shirt to the top. And then makes sure
that if you'd imagine that this will be our T-shirt
than we want it to be, of course, at the center
and maybe here at the top. So let's open up our grid here. Or maybe you better
the safe one year. And then position our shirt. Bring it a little
more to the left. Okay, this looks fine. And now of course, we want our texture to
fully covered this image. So therefore, we need to
increase it in scale, open up the scale by hitting S, make it maybe 200 per cent. And then place it here behind
or Bitcoin to the moon. Okay? And then we want to
bring up the track matte and choose luma matte shirt again as just we've done
before for our coin. And then of course, the same as in our last video. We want to also bring
up an effect which will be the brightness and contrast. Or in this case, let's just choose the
curves as this gives a little more possibilities to increase the
contrast even more. So here we want our
lighter areas to be even lighter and our darker
areas to be even darker. Then this structure
will be added. But right now it's
a little too much, not clearly visible anymore. So therefore, we'll bring those one's a little
more to the left. And this is looking
quite nice. I think. This is our final, uh, bitcoin to the
moon shirt design. And now we want
to render this so that you can really printed
on different shirts. Remember, if we want to
toggle our transparency grid, then you'll see that
this can really be printed on a
different colors. So we just want this to be printed as an image, of course. So therefore, let's scale down our work area to just
our first frame. And then open composition
add to render queue. In this case, of
course, we can render directly in After Effects. And now what you need to make sure is that for
the output module, we will of course
choose this one to be a sequence or an image
sequence, sequence. In this case, it won't really be a sequence because
it's just one frame, but makes sure it's
the PNG sequence here. And then we need to change, change the channel here
and add the alpha channel, which is really important because if you won't
add this tunnel, then all those black areas
here will really be printed in black so that you'll have a black border around our image. We don't want this to
happen, so therefore, we'll change this to RGB
plus Alpha. Hit. Okay? Now we can really
render our shirt design and make a ton of
money out of this. So that's it for this video. And in the next video, we want to see how I created the course image for this
Adobe After Effects course. See you for that one
in the next video.
48. After Effects Course Image Making Of: In this video, we want to take a closer look at how I created the course image of this Adobe After Effects course that
you are just watching. And again, am I proposer and you can't even say no to
that proposal would be that we will not
create a new project and recreate the
image from scratch, but we are browse through the different materials
that are used. And then we're going to go through all those
different layers, DLA one, until they are 24. And I'll explain the
functions of those layers in order to finally
create this image. So let's get started. And first of all, we have
our after-effects dot PNG, which no surprise is just the after-effects logo that I'm finally holding
here in my hands. Then we have to move it fires the camera one movie as well
as the drone movie files, which both are used here in
this camera one composition. But they are just
used as an image. And the drone one is doing
the petal here in the middle. And then we have the camera
one movie two times, one time here for this reg, which originally has been placed somewhere here
on the right side, but I think it fit a
little better here on top. So therefore, I cut that with a mask and move to
tier to the top. So this one here
is just the wreck. And finally here in third place, we have the battery as
well as all the rest. Finally create
this pattern which then will be placed
here on top of the image and lowering
opacity as well as only be visible in
black and white colors. Next in line we
have the Meta jpeg, and this is the
image in its origin. This is me standing in front of my green screen holding this
cocktail lounge bar here, which then would be replaced
by the after-effects image. Next in line we have
our symbols dot PNG, and this is just used for the camera as
well as the clipper, which then later on will
be changed in color. But we'll take a look
at that later on. And you'll see that here in
the course image, of course, The Clipper here down on the left empty camera here
in the upper right corner. Again, we have a texture
and in this case, all of the chalky, grayish one. This is just here
in the background. And then we have some watercolor
strokes that you can see here in the upper
left as well as bottom-right and
behind our camera and behind the Clippers. So here we have this image. And then I just cut out one watercolor stroke and
change that one in color again. So let's browse through
the different layers. First of all, we have
an adjustment layer, which is just my final
color correction. So there's just one effect
which is a curve effect. And if I deactivate that effect, you'll see that I just added some more contrast
to the final image. Then in second position, I have my first meet dot jpeg. This file is used, I think, three times in the
whole composition. And the upper one here
in second position. This is just my hand before, this After Effects logo here. So therefore, what
I did was I just duplicated the
normal middle JPEG, which has been, first of all, masked for only
the green screen. Then of course, tequila
effect that you've already gotten to
know to just cut out the green areas
and then I use the Roto Brush tool to really
concentrate on my hand. And a thing. There's also a curves effect to change the color
a little bit and also add more contrast to that. And this of course,
is also added to all the other meat
dot jpeg layers. And if I deactivate this layer, you'll notice that the only
function really is to let my hands appear in front
of the After Effects logo. Now, next in position 34, we have this After
Effects dot PNG file. The first one is
what you really see here in the foreground
with a glow effect in order to make it appear
a little more shiny and fit the colors to the
general colors of the image. And then we have
another one here, also with a glow effect. But in this case, I've
increased the radius to make it a little more
shiny in the background. And then both of
those layers here are 3D layers so that if we
bring up the position, you will see that
the second one here has been moved in z
space to make it appear like a little more of a 3D image that I'm really
holding something in my hands. And then in position five, we have the general
media JPEG image. This is really
what you see here. So if I deactivate that, That's really the main image. And then of course the
effects or the very same. So again, the key light effect. And finally, a
curves effect to add a little more contrast to the original image that
I've taken from myself. And then the next
imposition, six, as well as position seven, we have another duplicate
of the mid dot JPEG, which works together
with this solid. And this is here the border of myself that you'll see here. What I did for that
was to just make this solid an alpha
matte of the Meta jpeg. And also I increase the scale of this one here if you compare
it to the general image. This year it has been
scared to 43 per cent. And this one in
the background to forty-seven percent
in order to make it visible here behind myself. Next year in eighth position as the camera one composition
that you've already seen. And this is just
the general pattern here in front of our main image, modified with this
black and white effect in order to get rid of the red record button
because I didn't want any red colors to be
included in the final image. And what I also did was I lower the opacity for
that layer to 50%. Now in position nine, we have these symbols, dot PNG. Remember, those are the
symbols, for example, the camera as well as the
clipper but also other. So in this case, it's the camera that I cut
again with a mask and then I use the Roto Brush tool to really cut out
only the camera. And then this has
been modified with different color
changing effects. So for 1 second, Let's just deactivate those
three color effects here. First of all, we
have the hue and saturation effect that
I used in order to change the general masters you
here to minus 251 degrees, in order to first of all, change the blue color to a purple tone that would be
used in the final image. Then I didn't want this sort of greenish tone
here to be included, but I wanted it to be black. So therefore, this
is the first change to color effect here. And what I did was I picked
the greenish tone here and wanted it to change to sort of a grayish
or darker tone. And last, I don't know why
this is written in German, in Father and none,
but it's still the same effect as this one. It's also changed
to color effect. And again, what I did was I changed the general color
here off the camera and made it a little less bright in terms of the
purple that we will see. So this is the symbols that PNG to create the camera here. And then we have layers
tend to 13, to be honest, those are just some
trash leftovers from a tryouts in order to
create this course image. So for example, the
symbols that PNG in position 12th was
just another camera that I maybe wanted to include. But finally, all those layers, 101113, didn't make it to
the final course image. As you'll see, they
are all deactivated, so we can just select those
layers and delete them. Now let's continue with
the new layer ten, which is another
symbolist dot PNG. And in this case, of course, it's the clipper
that we'll see here. Cut out again with a mask. Then I added the hue
saturation effect and again change the March to hue to
make it a little more grayish. And then I use the Roto
Brush tool to really concentrate and cut
out only the clipper. And then finally, use the
change to color effect again, which in this case again
is written in German. And I change this sort of a bluish color to a
more grayish one here. So that's it for the two
symbols layer, layers. First of all, the camera
here on the upper right, and then the clipper
here on the left side. Next, we continue with
the water strokes. First of all, this one here is the water stroke here
on the upper left. And again, with all
those waters strokes, they work together
with the solid behind. So in this case, we have
a purple solid here. And what I did was I
changed this solid here to the Alpha Matte
watercolor strokes dot PNG, so that we will see this
stroke cut out with a mask in the color
of this solid. And this is the very same effect here for that watercolor stroke, visible in the color of that solid behind this clipper year. And again, we have another
one here behind this camera. And finally we have the fourth
watercolor stroke here, which is this one that you'll
see here on the right side, I think it's clear
how this one works. This was our original image
for the watercolor strokes. And I use gammas
to really cut out only one of those drugs,
originally in blue. And then of course, together
with this solid here, we can change the color in
to the one of that solid. And then for the final
two layers here, first of all, we
have our texture. And again, we have
normal gray solid, which works together
with that texture. Again, this solid here is a
luma matte for the texture. For that. Both of these layers
together create this sort of chalky image
here in the background. That's it. This is how I created my
course image by basically combining 20 and not 24 layers here to create this composition. I hope you learned something. In this section, we talked
about blending modes, created our very
own Bitcoin shirt. And I've also shown to
you how you could use track mattes in order to
combine colors and layers. And now as already said, we are going to finish this section and the next
section we're going to take a look on how to remove an add objects to different scenes.
49. What will happen in this section: In the upcoming section, it's all about modifying
your video material, meaning we're going
to learn about the 3D camera
tracker in order to, for example, integrate
text into landscape. And we're also going to
take a look at the content aware fill method
to be even able to replace existing
objects from scenes. To give you a better
overview of what we're going to cover
in this section. I created a short little video. So that's what we're going
to do in this section. First of all, we want
to start off and integrate the text
into a 3D landscape. That we have two
practical examples where we want to remove objects. First of all, remove people from the beach and then a
little more difficult, even remove a boat from the sea. And at the end we want to let some bank bills fly in space. So let's get started and
see you in the next video.
50. Practical example: Placing text in drone shot - The 3D camera tracker: So let's get started
with the goal of integrating our two texts
in this landscape shot. Now first of all, we have
the welcome to text here in the foreground linked
to this sort of plates. So that of course, if I have a rotational movement for this welcome to texts, than this very same movement and rotation will be
applied to the plate. So they are really
linked to each other. And that's what
we're going to do. We have some minor rotation
here so that we will be flying direct D through
the whole of this o. And then we continue
and move towards our second text, my home, which really appears
as if it was standing here on the grass, even with the shadow falling in the very same way as the
shadow here from this tree. By the way, what you'll
see here in the background is the highway number
one in Germany, That's where I'm living
in The Moonstone land. And if we come backwards
a little bit in time, then here is where we're standing to take
this drone shot, which by the way,
looked like this. But anyways, let's get started. Create a very new project and create this
one from scratch. So we go ahead and
hit File New Project. And of course we start by
taking our course material, the landscape dot mp4 shot, and dragging it in to our files. Now of course, you can
work this one out with me as the landscape shot is included in the
course materials, we begin by simply creating
a new composition out of this with the method that you've already
seen several times. So just drag that
file and let go here on this Create New
Composition button. There we are with our drone
shot ready to be edited. And now we want to use a
method or an effect allowing us to extract 3D data
from this source file. And this effect is the
so-called 3D camera tracker. There are several
ways to open this. Now the one that
I'm always using is to just open the
tracker here on the right. If you cannot see it, then maybe you just open
these arrows here and hit essential graphics so that
here the tracker appears, or you might even want to
click Window and make sure that the tracker here is Mark so that you'll find
it here on the right side. And we can see it already, the track camera here. But as this will just bring up an effect and start
the analysis. Therefore, we can
also just open effect and hit perspective
3D camera tracker. This will do the very same. And of course you
can also just go ahead and open the effects
bar here on the right side. Just search for that effect and then just drag drop
it onto our video. But as I've already
said, normally, I am using the tracker
directory here. And now I want to
hit tracker camera. And this will directly open up the analysis of our drone shot. So right now as
you can see here, the process is initializing and then it will be analyzed
frame by frame, which is a very complex process. So right now we are in
frame number eight or 385, and this will take a couple of minutes right now, six
minutes remaining. So of course, I want to save that time and we'll see again
when the process is done. Alright, so the 3D camera
tracker has done its job. And next we could go
ahead and directly use this button here to
create a new camera. But for now we don't want to do so as we want to take
a closer look at all these points that have
been added to our source file. And these points are
so-called track points, and they will really be
followed along in time. And as you've already seen, if I take the selection tool and move over here in our shot, then I'll raise three
of those points will be taken to sort of give us this proposal for
the red target area. And as I'm sure you
are an expert in math and have always listened
carefully in school. You know that three points
that are not laying on a line always define
a so-called plane. So this red area here is
the plane that will be proposed from the
three points in focus. And of course here are
those points basically create a very similar plane because they are all
laying on the field. But if I change this
and for example, move here in the tree, then you'll see that the plane will be a very different one. And we want to use these points now to create the second texts. We'll start by doing that one. And therefore we
fly over a year. We arrive at the
second grass here. And there you'll see that we have a lot of
points here as well. If we just grab three
of those points, then the plane will really be what we want it to be
directly here on the grass. So let's just take, for example, these three points here and then right-click and choose
create text and camera. Now what this will
do is first of all, add a text layer as well as the 3D tracker camera
layer to our composition. And now this texts
here is directly lying in the new
created plain area. So we want to take that text. First of all, change
it to my home. Then we want to make
it a little smaller. First of all, we open
the scale options by hitting the shortcut S, and we want to scale
it down to a 100%. And then maybe make
it a little larger, let's say 700 pixels. And this should be okay. So right now we
have the text here perfectly matched on
our plane on the grass. But of course, we want the text to release
stand on the grass, so therefore we will later
on move it in 90 degrees. And that's why it's
very important that we'll write our
texts and capita layers. Because imagine if we have
the letter Y here and it's just lying below the M or the home than we
can not really yeah. Move their texts for 90
degrees because then we'd have the home flying in space. So that's of course
not what we want, but we want all
those letters to be standing on the grass. Therefore, we write
it in capital. And now let's continue. First of all, make sure that the baseline
shift is set to 0 because this will be
defining on where we will move the texts if we
rotate it for 90 degrees. So therefore, maybe from a previous project you'll
have some baseline shifts. So make sure that's 0. And also what we want to make sure, because we want it to be rotated right now
for the x-axis. And therefore the
anchor point should be here below our texts. Let's take the x axis here. So hit the red circle here. Let's your, leave your
left mouse button clicked and then you can
rotate the texts and you'll see that it will
be rotated perfectly here around our anchor point, which is lying here directly
below the age of the home. Now, if you'd have
another anchor point, let's say for example, somewhere here so that the
anchor point or the point of origin for all our rotation will be somewhere
here inside the age. Then of course, the effect
by rotation is not where we want it to be
because it will not directly be moved up
here on the grass. But as already said, it will be moved and rotate
it here inside this H. So of course we wanted to, we want the rotation to
originate here below the age. So therefore, taken
our red circle now and rotating it is exactly
what we want to achieve. Now, you could go ahead and take this red circle
here to rotate it. Or what you could
also do this open up position data here as well
as our rotation data. So bring up the
transform options. And then what you'll see
here is the orientation, which is now 276 degree for the text to be perfectly
lying on the grass. And then we could just click in there and type plus 90 degrees. And this will of course, create the very same effect
that we want it to be. Now let's move the
text a little bit. So therefore, we will just
go to that red arrow here and let your left mouse button pressed again and move it
a little to the right. And maybe we also wanted a
little bit to move in z space, so this should be fine. Maybe rotate it a little bit. In terms of why. Something like this. And a little bit
more to the right. Okay, It should be
fine like this. And next what we want
to add is of course, bring up a shadow
and light so that it will be looking a
lot more realistic. And we want to
focus on the shadow of the tree to sort of recreate that shadow and let our texts appear as if it was really
standing here on the grass. That's what we're going
to do in the next part.
51. Practical example: Placing text in drone shot - light and shadow in space: Okay, let's go ahead
and learn about shadows and lights inside
of Adobe After Effects. And of course, at the end
we have the final goal to add realistic shadow to
this my home texts here. Now, the easiest way
to create sort of an artificial shadow would be to just take this text here, duplicate it with Control D. And then this new
created second texts, we want to bring it back to its original position
and original rotation. So we take this red X wheel here and rotate the
text back to the floor. And then of course,
we'll change the color, make it black or at
least sort of dark gray. Hit Okay, and you'll
see that we've begun to create this artificial shadow, which to be honest,
might be sufficient for a lot of projects
you want to create. And we can even then
lower the opacity. So open T to bring up the opacity option than
lower that to maybe 60%. And what we can also do
is bring up the scale. Then first of all,
unlocked the dimensions here so that we can
work with the x, y, and z value here separately. And then we can, for example, take the y-value here and
increase that and improve our shadow to the desires that we have for our
specific project. But in this case, as we want to duplicate the cetera
here from this tree, we will get some problems by simply duplicating
this text layer. So what we want to do is create a real shadow inside of
Adobe After Effects. So therefore, let me
just first of all, get rid of this
second text again. And then we open
the Layer New and start off by adding
light to our project. Therefore, new light. And we'll stay with the
name of Spotlight one. And of course they are different line types like for example, a spotlight to ever
really centered light. Or what we can choose is a
point light and ambient light. For now, you don't have to know about all of these
different options. But what we want to start
with is create a point light. And important is that we want
this light to cast shadows. So therefore, hit this option. And then we want to click OK. And you'll see that this
point light has been edit. Now at first, it might seem that nothing
really has changed. Apart from that the text is appearing that a
little bit darker. And that's because we can't even really see
where the light is. And if we come back in time
here to our beginning, then you'll see
that here is where the light has been placed
inside of our composition. Now, if we open the my home text positional
data again by hitting P, then you will see
that this text here, which is sort of at the
end of our sequence, has a zed value of
above 10 thousand. Then we have the light and we opened the positional
data for that one. And it has that value
of only about 1300. And this is because here at
the beginning of our clip, we are in zed value, like about, about thousand, and then we fly mainly
in that space until we arrive here at the
end of values above 10 thousand and even
above 13 thousand. So what we wanna
do, first of all, is take this point
light and move it a little bit closer
to my home texts. So therefore we take the
zed value of that light and change it to 10 thousand, hit. Okay? Now you'll see
that the text has changed and we go
forward in time. And now you'll see
that the light is been placed a lot closer
to my home texts. And now we can play
around with this slide, for example, move it in x. And you'll see that it's taken effect on
our my home text. Now of course, we can
change it in any dimension. We might want to
move it up in y. And you'll see that it will have some
effects on our text. However, we cannot see
any shadows for now. But what we can do is as soon as you have added a
light to your composition, there will be some more
data for any layer. For example, this
text layer here. We can now open the material options and
we'll see that we have now a different light
options here and even shadow options for
this my home texts. So what we could,
for example, do, we could deactivate here this option to accept
shadows or accept lights. Now as we cannot see any shadows right now, let's for now, deactivate the option to accept lights and you'll
see that the text is back to its standard with
the light blue color. But we want this text to
accept lights for now. And at the end of course, we want to create
a realistic shadow for this my home text. So why four? Now, even if the cast
shadows option is turned on, we cannot see any shadows appearing inside
our composition. And well, this is because
at the beginning, yes, we have analyzed our
stock video or drone shot and created a lot
of track points. But still, of course,
it's impossible to interpret and to
analyze the footage in a way so that After
Effects knows on where to catch the
shadows from this text. Because imagine, for example, we'd create a shadow
that needs to be stopped here at this tree and then
continues behind the tree. So there's no way
that After Effects knows that here
inside our footage, there's a 3D object
that we need to shadow to stop and then afterwards
continue with the shadow. So therefore, what
we need to do is help a little bit and create a solid that would catch the shadow of this,
my home text. And we can do so by,
for example, again, selecting our landscape
video and then opening up the 3D camera tracker to
bring back those points. And then we want to select
three of those points, creating the grass area. And we want to right-click
and choose create solid. Now what this will do is add another solid to
our composition. And first of all, I want
to change the color of that solid to make it a
little better visible for you. Maybe we'll make it white. And now you'll see
that the shadows off this my home text begin to work. And of course, the
direction of that shadow is determined by
our point light. So if I move this light a
little bit more to the right, you'll see that the
direction of the shadow falling on this solid that we've just
created is changing. And you could change
the light, of course, in this direction as well
as any other direction. This one will make it
lighter in general. Therefore, we can move
the light as we want to. Now, moving lights,
to be honest in After Effects is a little
difficult at least for me. And what I always
like to do is create another camera and linked the camera to the
position of the light. And therefore, if
I move the light, then the position of the
camera will move as well. And I can watch from that
position of the camera on what the light will do and where the light finally
will be placed. That was just a general
explication and some words of introduction on how to use lights and shadows
inside of After Effects. But for now, let's
again delete the solid as well as also the
created point light. And what we wanna
do now is again, select our landscape and the
3D camera tracker effect. Choose three of
those points here. And we want to right-click. And now not create a solid, but create a shadow
catcher and allied. And what this will do is basically very similar
to what we did before. The shadow catcher layer
that has just been created. Basically again,
it's only a solid. We have this newly
added light here. The only difference is that
for now the shadow catcher, if we open the material options and we bring up the
option except shadows, you'll see that it's
switched to only. So therefore, we can only
really see the shadows, but not the solid itself. If we bring this to off, you'll see the solid itself. And if we bring it to all, you'll see the solid
as well as the shadow. But of course, as we want
to create a shadow, only, the right option here
is to stick with only the shadow
has been created. And of course, as
already mentioned, the direction of that shadow
is dependent on the light. So let's again find our light. And here you will see if we come to the beginning of
our composition again, you'll see that the light year is positioned at
the upper right. So to be honest for me, this is more or less
a trial and error now to move the light in order to create a realistic shadow
for our composition. And of course, we want the
shadow to really go here to the left in a parallel
way to this tree. First of all, what we
can see here is that we have the border from our solid. And of course, we don't
want this to happen. And therefore what
we'll do is we bring up the scale
of that solid and basically just scale a solid up in order to be able to
really catch our shadow. But this will have, of course, no effect on the
shadow itself as we just scale up the solid. And now let's move the light
in a way that it will appear more realistic and match
the shadow of our tree. So let's just bring up the positional data
of our light by using the shortcut P. And now what we wanna do is simply play
around with the X, Y, and Z values and see
what they finally do for us in terms of where the shadow of this my home text
will be falling. So we want to start
with the x value. Just use your left mouse button and make sure to also press the Shift button and all u2 faster change those
large numbers. And then you'll see that
if we increase the value, the shadow will more or
less four to the left. And if we decrease that value, will bring the shadow
more to the right. So maybe for now, let's
just place it maybe here. And then we continue
with the Y value. And you'll see again
with the Shift button pressed that if we
increase the value, shadow will be enlarged. And if we decrease that value, it will be closer to our text. So maybe you want to
have it like this. And then we'll continue
with the zed value. And you'll see this will sort of bring our shadow up or down. So for now, let's
just leave it here. And to be honest,
is it just more or less of a trial and error until we have a shadow that
really fits to our project. Maybe also what I wanna do is again rotate my text a little bit to this position here. And now again change the
position of our shadow. And now you'll see that
it really starts to match the position of our tree. Let's just play around
with that a little more to make it even better. This looks quite nice. And now what I
also want to do is improve the position of
our texts a little more. So either select
the text here in the sources or
directly click onto our text inside
the preview area. And then we want to
move this one up in y position a little bit so that it really matches
the shadow like there. And lastly, we also
want to change the color of the text
and make it even darker. Something like this. Hit okay? And if we now zoom out, I really feel like we've created a very realistic 3D texts here, standing on the grass
as if it was really very well integrated
into our landscape. Let's also check that
one out in time. And you'll see that
when we fly over there, it really looks like the texts was standing there creating this nice realistic effect
that we wanted to achieve. So that's it for this video, and I can assure you
that by doing so, the most difficult
part has been done and all that's
missing right now is the first text which
will be welcome to that we need to
rotate and move a little bit so that
we will be flying through the whole of the O and then continuing on to fly
over until we see My home. So that's it for this part. And then the last part, we'll do so and create. Welcome to see you.
52. Practical example: Placing text in drone shot - Integrate additional text: In the last video, I already mentioned that
the most difficult pieces of this practical example
have already been achieved. And this indeed is
true because now for the second texts
that we also want to introduce into our scene, we of course, don't have
to pay attention and position the text to any plane. And secondly, as the text
is flying in the air, there will be no shadows
that we need to consider. So therefore, we can go
straight forward and just create a new text by using
our horizontal text tool. Just click into our preview
area and we want to type, welcome to maybe better
positioned this in two lines. And then I can already
see that we need to adjust the leading here. Maybe switch this one to auto, or maybe decrease
it a little bit. Something like 500.
But first of all, let's just make this
one capital letters. And again, we also want to
make it a little smaller, something like this, and change
the text color to black. And now as we fly
through in space, while you'll notice, of course, is that our text
won't be affected. And this is because still
now it's no 3D layers. So we want to change that. Toggle the 3D switch for
our welcome to texts. And now you'll notice
that the text is very well integrated into our scene. So all we need to do now
is make sure that we will leave perfectly flying
through the whole of this O. And then maybe
bring in some more rotation and movement for the text to make it appear
a little more dynamic. So let's maybe find a point in time where we want to
fly through the O. So here the texts
should be visible. And maybe at this point here, we want to be flying through
the whole of the old. So therefore we will bring up the position as well
as the rotation data. Remember P to open the
position and then you'll hit Shift R to also
add the rotation. So first of all, we want to play around with these
positional data. Remember, for the,
my home texts, if we also want to open
the position for that one, you'll notice that it has
a very large zed value. So being here at the back
for the second grass area, they are, the zed value
will be very large. While here at the beginning, remember when we first
introduced our light, there was a very small z value, something about a thousand. So changing the z value
will move the text here four and back in
this positional data. So therefore, let's play around with the zed value first of all, and now we want to
position it so that it will be perfectly
centered around our oath, that we'll be flying
around through that. Oh, if we now again
increase the value of this position here until we really have been flying
through the whole of the old, bring it down a little more. This looks good.
And now we'll be perfectly flying
through the hole. And this point we want to save. So just click on this
stopwatch here for the position as well as
for the orientation. And this will just
make sure that will be really
flying through the whole no matter what we
will be changing for the position and rotation
data here at the beginning. So now maybe we want to bring
this text a little more up. Either we could now play around with the x
and y data here, or we just take the
text and maybe move it here into the
upper left corner. And then we also
want to bring in a rotation, maybe like this. And then let's see. If we also want to rotate in z. This, it looks good and overall, Let's make the text
a little smaller. Maybe like this, and then also decrease the lead here to 400. Maybe this looks good. And now as we've decreased
the text and size, Let's see if we will still be flagged through
the whole of the oh, no, I've changed
that one as well. So baby, again, we come
back to that point, change the zed value so we can better see where
we currently are. And then we reposition the
x and y data very quickly. Bring back the row
to the middle. And again, flight through
the all just like that. This is already
looking quite good. And now what I also edit
beside the rotation here. Maybe let's bring this one down. A little more.
Speculation right now, but I think this looks good. So that we really flying through the O and coming
back to the start. And now what I also
added was sort of this border here for
the welcome too, to make it like a sign. And therefore, we need to. Add a new layer to our project. So choose Layer, New Solid. And we want to make
this one comp size and the color doesn't
really matter, but we want to name this one, maybe border hit, Okay. And I will lower the opacity
for a second to 50 per cent. And now of course, we also want to make
this one a 3D layer. And what's important is that
we want this to be very well sort of linked to
the welcome to text. And we do so by simply choosing
this pick whip tool here. And we want to choose it for the position as well
as the rotation. So we'll hit to
open the position. Shifts are to open the orientation or remember
at any time you can also just open the
Transform options to find the ones
you want to link. And in this case
it's the position. So take the pick whip
tool for that one, link it to the positional data
from the Welcome to texts. And then also take
the orientation and link it to the orientation
of our welcome to texts. And what this will
do, of course, is just duplicate
those two datasets and apply them for this, for this border solid
that we've just created. And now what I did
was I added a mask. So just hit Q here until you arrive for the rounded
rectangle tool. And the good thing
in this case is that the rectangle will be
placed for this solid. Meaning that if I start
dragging this rectangle now, it will be created in the exact way that
we want it to be. So that we can just let go here. And we have created this nice
little rounded rectangle here around our text. Now of course, this would
also be one option to have a semi-transparent layer where you fly through and
bam, there you are. And the new sort of
seen as a raven. In this case, I want to only half the board
as visible and therefore I'll choose Effect, Generate and stroke. And now what I want
to do is I want the paint style to
be on transparent. So therefore, what
this will make sure is that we'll only see the path of this
stroke which will be applied to our mask that
we've just created. And then we want the
color to be black. And then we will
increase the brush size. There we are with a nice
little border here around o. Welcome to text. Now, this is looking a
little awkward because the transparency or
opacity is still lowered. So let's open up T to bring up the opacity and bring
it back to 100%. Now, that's what I did in
the practical example. We have our rotation here. You have a little movement. Or let's add some more
movement by opening up the position and move this one a little
bit in x maybe, so that it will really fly in. Make sure there's no other
positional data here. So delete that keyframe
and we'll have this sign moved and rotated
a little bit and then fly and perfectly through
the hole. Now one laugh. Last thing I added was too little strokes here on the left and the
right side of the two. And that's what I'll quickly do. So just again with
our solid selected, open the pen tool,
create another mask. Let's just zoom in
here for a little bit. Begin here, make another
mask point here. And then quickly select
another layer and come back to that layer in order to
not continue with this mask, but to create a new mask. The third mask.
And there we are. Maybe grip this one, bring
it a little bit done. Like here. Also bring down this
point a little bit. This looks fine and
all we need to do now is just change the path here from only mask
one to all masks. And therefore, we have this
two little strokes edit. And this is exactly what I did
for the practical example. We have a nice little
welcome to sign. However, I want to make sure
that we can really read it. So therefore, bring a little to the right
with a little bit. And maybe move this one a
little bit in that space so that we also added some
nice little movement beside our rotation.
And there we are. Welcome to. We were flying through this
sign towards our my home. And that's how it introduce the nice monster
lend to you guys. And I hope you enjoyed
this tutorial. And next in line, what we wanna do is, right now we added some objects or text
to existing scenes. And the next part, we want to do the
exact opposite and remove objects from
existing scenes. So therefore, I got to
practical examples for you and we'll start off directly with the first one. See you.
53. Addition to the topic of light in After Effects: Before we really kick it
off and start to remove objects from existing
scenes in just a second. At this point, I just like to give you a little addition to the functionality of lights
and shadows, or better said, I want to show you
a general approach that I always like to use when trying to understand more difficult
methods and effects. And this method is
to just break it down to the most basic
setting possible. And then check out
for myself how different modifications
were work and what their effect will be. So in this case, as we want to learn about lights and shadows, what I did was I just created a very basic 3D room setting. So in this case, we have this gray solid year
functioning as our floor. Then we have another
white solid which represents the background wall. And if we want to now
change this camera to the left view than what
you'll see, of course, is that here we have
the background was on it with a rotation
of 90 degrees. We have the floor solid. And then what you see here is just the very basic
object I added, which in this case it's
just the red letter a. Now of course, all those
three layers are 3D layers. So in this case, we have the letter a and
the white and the gray solid or turned
on for the 3D switch. And what I also made sure was that for the
material options, we allow the red letter a here to cast
shadows, of course. So make sure to also
turn this option on. And if you then add a
light as well as a camera, then you might want
to start and check out for yourself what
would happen if we, for example, change the position of the light in terms
of the x value. Or we might even change the y-value and see the
effect of this one. Or maybe you also want to check out the whole setting from different perspectives
by changing the camera position
and rotation. So therefore, for example, just open up the orbit around cursor so that we can
really fly around. See the whole setting
from different angles. Now what you might also
want to learn about is different light types. So therefore, just select
the point light here, open up the light
settings and maybe switch the type to a spotlight. So what you'll notice
is that the light is more centered to sort of create this onstage effect and will be also might
want to do is even add another light source to see how several lights work out
together in one scene. So therefore just
open Layer New Light. And this time we might want to add a point light hit, Okay? And you'll see that
the whole setting were turned a lot brighter. And right now we
have two shadows. Because of course we have also added two lights to our scene. So all in all, a great method to learn about
lights and shadows. Check it out for yourself. But for now, that's it. Now we want to continue
as planned and start removing objects
from existing scenes.
54. Practical example: removing objects by content-aware fill - beach: In the next two videos, we want to check out a
method that allows us to remove objects from
existing scenes. Now again, of course, I brought concrete
practical examples. So feel free to
grab those course materials and follow along. Now the first example, the beach dot mp4 file. There, we just want to remove pedestrians from
a beach in Miami. For the second
file, the boat mp4, we want to remove a boat
from the sea in Mexico. Now, the first example
will be a lot easier. Maybe you already
have an idea why. And if not, no problem. We'll see inside the process
of those two videos where the differences are
and why the board one will be a little
more difficult. So let's just begin and
take the beach file, drag it into a new composition. And what we wanna
do now is we have this beautiful beach here in Miami flying over with my drone. And the only sort of
disturbing part in this video are those three pedestrians here at the bottom are
walking on the sand. We'd like to remove
those pedestrians. And of course, we not
only want to remove them, but we want to replace
the whole that will be, that will be created by of course and intelligent
surrounding and create an
intelligent substitute for those pedestrians. So the method that
we want to use is the so-called
Content Aware Fill. And here you can see it already on the right side
below our tracker. Again, if you won't
see this one, then either just switch to the essential
graphics or makes sure that you have the window Content Aware Fill checked here. Now, we want to open this
up and what we need, first of all, it's a target. And I've already said
that what we want to fill these pedestrians here. So let's just start by creating a mask around those
pedestrian CIA. Therefore, again, just use the button queue to navigate through those
different tools here. And then we want to
take the ellipse tool. And if you now use
the Shift button, then what you'd see is
that the ellipse that we create will be a perfect circle. So make sure to leave the
Shift button pressed. And then an ellipse like this, or a circle like
this should be fine. And we will move this one a little bit with
our arrow keys like this. It should be good.
Now first of all, what we need to
make sure is that the circle will
not be too large. This is because the
larger will be, the higher the greater the task will be for
after effects for the content and we'll fill
method to do its job. And secondly, of course, we also don't want
the circle to be too small because
what After Effects will do in a second is just create an
intelligent substitute. And if we make this
circle too small, then maybe the heads of those
people will be recreated, duplicated many more times
and again after the process, see those heads
still in place here. Of course, we don't want. So therefore a circle
like this should be fine. And now for a second, I just want to switch this mask to none so that we can see the
whole picture again. Then we'll go forward in time until those pedestrians
leave the frame. And what we'll do now is
of course, take the mask, open it, and then
we want to animate the mask, the mask path. So therefore, just for a second, come back to the start. Taking a mask point here. And then again move forward
to the second keyframe. And now we want
to move the mask. By the way, if you
have some problems moving the mask and for example, you just go inside
and destroy the mask, then just hit the up
button while doing so. Then you really ensure that you'll always take
the whole mask and replace it to where you
want to. So there we are. And now what we also need to do as the pedestrians are
moving closer to the camera, of course, the mask now
should be a little larger. So what we're gonna
do is I want to again add the mask
and then we'll add a mask expansion here. So therefore, let's just
create a keyframe and then we want to maybe widen this for 40. And again, move the
mask a little bit. That's what I just told you. So better just select the Alt button while
doing so and move the mask over to here
so that the shadows are still inside of our mask. And of course we want to
go back to the start, switch the mask expansion to 0. And now let's see in some points here in-between
that the mask will still fit. Our pedestrians maybe want
to start here in the middle. And again with the Add button pressed, reposition the mask. And now it's in a sort
of intelligent way, work your way through. So again, we'll take. For example, half the time between our first and
our second mask point. Again, do a little adaption
year so that it fits. This looks good. And there we are here
for another point. Remember that here
already there will be a mask expansion of 30 pixels, so it should be okay like this. Then let's see out here. Use the hand tool. And again, move the mask a
little bit like over there. Let's check out
here one more time. This looks good. This
also looks good. Alright, so let's only
find out here at the end. Now those pedestrians
are leaving. So we just again take the mask and follow
along like this. And now I think the pedestrians will be in place all the time. But let's make sure by
just adding the mask. And we'll see that together
with the mask expansion. Now the pedestrians really
are in place all the time. So that's exactly what we want. And now, in order for the Content Aware fill
method to do its job, what we need to
make sure is that the mask we're not
be set to add, but we want to subtract it. So therefore, this sort of hole that we just
created will be what we want to give over to
the so-called fill target. And then we have some
more adjustments that we might make here. First of all, the fill method. But in this case, we
want to stick with object as we have
a flying camera. But we want to remove an object, which in this case are
those three pedestrians. And then we also might
change the range here. We could either
select the work area, the entire duration
of the composition. In this case, it's
just the same. But of course it
might be possible that you want to remove an object only from certain
parts of your composition. So by the way, then you could
just take your work area, let go here to adapt it. Or what you also might
use other shortcuts, B and N. If you hit
the shortcut B, then you'll create a
beginning point of your work area at the
current cursor position. And if you use the shortcut N, then you just create
an endpoint for your work area at the
current cursor position. So those two might be
some useful shortcuts. But in this case,
as we just want to select the whole work area or the whole composition
as arrange, we are now ready to go. And what I'll do is I'll hit the Generate Fill Layer
button to start the process. And now this might
take some seconds, but in this case, the new layer
has already been created. And what this layer will be is just a sequence of
PNG image files. And now let's have a
look at all those files. This is a PNG sequence that
has just been created, starting at frame
0 until frame 242, which of course is
the very last frame of our composition. And basically, what
you can see in these pictures is
just the mask hold. We passed over to the
Content Aware fill method, and that now has
been intelligently replaced by new material. This material, the PNG sequence that has already
been imported and put into first-place here
above our beach layers. So therefore, all in all, you really can't notice
that there have been any pedestrians in
this drone shot. So if I deactivate this
fill layer one more time, you'll see this was the
mass that we passed over. And now with the fill layer, we have some new material, which is just the picture at this certain frame in time that has been
replaced to fill this gap. By the way, in some cases, it might be that there are some very small borders
here around your mask. And in this case, of course, you want to get rid
of that border. And what you can do
is just bring up our beach or original
video to the top. And then open up the mask
settings and just decrease the mask extension a little bit, make it maybe minus two
pixels at this point, and then move forward to the
second keyframe where we just fix the mask expansion
and make it 39 pixels. And all in all, this will be no problem as we
created the mask, just a little bigger
than necessary. So therefore, we
can decrease it for two more pixels in order to
get rid of those borders, which in some cases
might be created. Maybe if you switch the resolution just to quarter
and start the process. In this case, we didn't
see any borders, but in some cases, just if you see those borders, this is what you can do. And of course what you
might also do if you have some more difficult
projects and you will see those borders
are a little hard. Then of course you can again, also open up your mask
options and maybe add some mask feather to make it a little
more smooth or so. All in all, there
are a lot of ways to further improve your results. Now, still here the
results are perfect. And of course, this is
because this example was very easy to solve
for After Effects. And this is because
the material that we use to replace our pedestrians
is just all the same. So it's a very easy structure. In this case, the sandwiches has the same color at all pixels. So therefore, it doesn't really matter that After Effects, does this pixel perfect? And this is the great
change that we now want to get through for
the second project. Because of course, there
we have moving water, which naturally is a more difficult
structure to be solved. Now honestly, in this case, I feel like we
wouldn't even need the content aware fill method
to replace our pedestrians. Let me just deactivate this fill layer for a
second to show you. And then if I duplicate
our original beach video, just get rid of this
mask for a second and draw another mask here
besides are pedestrians. And then maybe add a feather to that mask we just created. Maybe make it 20 pixels and just move over
the whole layer to cover are pedestrians. You'll see that if I do some
small adjustments, extent, expand the mask for
maybe ten pixels, and just follow along with
this mask in the whole shot. Then I feel like for this
shot it would be enough. And we'll also get
the very same result. But using the Content
Aware fill method is the correct and the more easily the better
way to replace objects. And also we want to use this method to now focus on
a more difficult project, which will be to get rid of
a boat on the sea in Mexico. See you for that one
in the next video.
55. Practical example: removing objects by content-aware fill - boat: Now here we are at
the beach in Mexico. And what we'd like to do for this practical example is replaced our boat
with some water. Now I've already
explained to you that this practical example is way more difficult because
we have moving water, we have reflections,
and also we have waves, which all in all just
make it a lot more difficult to, first of all, interpret this
footage and secondly, replace it in a way
so that we will not notice that this has not
been our original image. Therefore, what I need
it to come out with a satisfying result is just a combination of some
more layers in this case. And right now I'm
going to quickly show you what those
layers will do for us. And then afterwards
we're going to speak about that in some more details. So let's start off with
position number six year. And this is just
our original file. In all those points in time
where nothing really happens. So before I want my
boat to be replaced, layer number six doesn't
really do anything for us. And then starting from here is where it begins,
layer number five. And this is just the way
that you already know. So I created a
mask for our boat. And this is the mask
that I will pass over to the Content Aware fit
method in a subtracted way. Of course, just like in the practical example
of the last video. And now what to edit
R to fill layers. So to Content Aware, Fill generated PNG
sequences which differ only because of the
change expansion of the mask. Meaning here in
position number four. I expanded the mask that I created here in position number five to create my first
Content Aware Fill here. And now this still doesn't really look perfect
here at the borders. And in my opinion, it's a little too greenish. And therefore I added another
Content Aware Fill layer. So created another PNG sequence, which different in a way that
here the mass that I used was not expanded in that manner, but just expanded a
little less so therefore, the newly created sequence length just here
inside our mask. And it's just putting above the second fill
layer and now of course, with a lower opacity
so that both of these generated PNG sequences
work out together. And then still a fed like, first of all, the borders
didn't really look perfect. So therefore, what I did was I duplicated my original MP4 file, and then together with
a mask and a feather, I worked on those borders, as you can see, if I turn on and off this layer. So that's just basically
enhancing my borders here. And lastly, to give it a little more wavy feeling
here inside the mask, because right now
we have of course, combined a lot of
different layers. So we want more sharp waves
to also come in place. And what I did for
that was I again duplicated my original MP4 file. And then as I've also shown
to you in the last video, I just took another area like this area where we have airwaves
in place without a boat, and then move that one over
here to our replaced boat. And again, of course I lower the opacity for that
one so that all in all, I really feel like
now we can not notice any difference here. So it really looks like an original image without
any bolts here on the C. So now let's speak about all those different layers
in a bit more detailed way. So I've already
mentioned, again, we start just as you know, and create a mask
around our boat. And if I open up my
key framed layers, my keyframe effects by
hitting the shortcut you. Then you'll notice
that of course again, my mask path has
been animated in a way that I will follow
the boat along in time. In this case, I
didn't need to also animate the mask
expansion because the boat was always
the same size. So therefore, we're all fine with just animating
the mask path. And then what I did was for my first Generate Fill Layer
here for this PNG sequence, quickly open up
the mask options. I expanded my mask by 65 pixels. So let's just do that. And then for 1 second
solo, this layer. So then we have this
mask here that I will pass over to degenerate
fill method. So all in all we have a
lot of space here beside our boat where we can play with in order to then finally
enhance this borders. Of course, I made
sure that it's still only water that is covered
here in this mask. That the mask is not
as big to finally reach those boats here
or even the beach. So that's what I did for my
first Generate Fill Layer. And then for the second one, I only expanded the mask, I think for ten pixels. So this is my second
Generate Fill layer, which leads to a sort
of different result. And then I combine those
two generated layers here to finally come out
with my replaced image. Let's see here. If I solo this
Generate Fill layer, you see this is just the
mouth that I've shown to you, replaced with my content
aware fill method. And then above this, we have the other generated. Png sequence, which first
of all is lower in opacity, and as already mentioned, is a lot smaller. And then above that
layer what we did was we copied our original file. And now here if I open
up the mask options, you'll see that I added a feather and I
expanded it even less, so I brought it back
to 0 pixels to them. Finally, enhance my Boris here by adding a little feather. And then at the top, what I did was I just
took a different area. So if I open up my position
that data from this MP4 file, you'll see that
originally this was at position nine hundred sixty
and five hundred forty. So it's this area
that I took and yeah. Just covered with a
mask and then brought this area above our
to be replaced board. And also lower the
opacity a little bit for this one to 56 per cent. To just add a little more
waves here inside our area. And all these layers combined
then finally lead to this, I feel like a very
satisfying result as if there never has been
a boat on the ocean. That's it for this tutorial. And by the way, what
I'd like to show you is another
method that you can really use in order to replace
an object from a still. So if you're not working
with a moving sequence, a video, than what you might do is concentrate on a still. And therefore, let's
just double-click this boat layer here. And then I want to
move over to our boat. And what you then might use is the so-called clone stamp tool. Now, first of all, it works very similar to the Roto Brush Tool, so that you can use your control to enlarge or shrink your stamp, and then you just hit the Alt
button to fill your stamp. Use also the leftmost button, alt and left mouse button
pressed to fill your stem. And then just use your
left mouse button to let go for the stem. In this case here above our boat that we
want to be replaced. Now I really think this
looks already quite nice. Let's again fill our stamp. Let go here to finally replace
the last bits of our boat. And then just for the steel, we have replaced our boat
just in a matter of seconds. So that's just a method that I wanted to show you
if you want to work with still images in order
to get rid of objects, really in just a second. And also here we have a
difficult surrounding. A difficult yeah. Just objects to be replaced
together with those wastes, but still it looks like they never has been a
bolt on this image. So that's just for you to
also gets to know this stamp. But of course, if you're
working with video material, my advice would be to use the Content Aware fill method to finally come out with
a satisfying result. And sometimes, as in this case, you need to combine
different layers to just work your way through
to a good solution. So that's it for now. And with this tutorial, we'll also finished with replacing objects
from existing scenes. And now what we'd like to do is something very
different about we want to let some bank
birds fly in our poker room. So therefore, again, I
created some material for you to use and also added the bills for you in
the course material. So that again, we can
work this one out together and let's get
started in the next video.
56. Practical example: levitating objects in real 3D space - Part 1: Let's add some magic
to this course and lead bank birds
fly in space. And for this one, we want to get started by having a look at the final result on
what we are going to create together in this
practical example. Now, before we want to
switch to After Effects, and again started with a
completely new and empty project to recreate this, let's first of all have a closer look on
some details that we are going to add in the
course of the next videos. So first of all, if you want to follow this 200 Euro bill, then you'll notice
that it'll fly it from the right side
to the left side. And also dynamically, animators
sort of curling in space, moving with the wind before then finally disappearing
to the left side. And also there are
some more bills that have been animated. Like for example,
if you take a look, this 200 Euro bill, then you'll see that it's sort
of starts to roll up here, as well as the very same here
for this 200-year a bill. Before all those bursts, then finally sealed to
move inside the PAGA case, which then gets closed until
the video is finished. So that's what
we're going to do. So therefore, let's now
switch to After Effects. And I've already imported all those different
materials that again, of course, are ready for you to use in the course
materials as well. We want to get started with the method that you've
already seen several times. So just grab our original video and create a new composition. Now first of all, in this case, I want to sync my audio files. So for the poker table, all we have in this
file in terms of audio, it's just me closing the
poker case at the end. So we want to add the swoosh as well as
the magic MP3 file to generate a better
audio all in all. So therefore, let's start
with the Magic file. And this is just sort of, yeah, the jingle that is
playing in the background. So it should be fine starting
at the beginning and then just rolling out here
where then I finally, we'll also be closing
the poker case. So this should be good. Just like it has been
placed right now. And now we want to
add this swash, which should be the sound when all those bills start
flying into the poker case. So let's just open up the waveform either by
hitting those arrows, see until you arrive
for the waveform. Or what you could also do
is use the shortcut L, L, so double-click L. And this will also
bring up your waveform. You, that's also do that
for the magic fire. And then bring up
some more space here. And let's reposition this to
the point in time where I want those bills to fly
inside the poker case. So this is just me taking the case and then
moving it to the side. And this here should
be a good point in time where all those bills
start to fly over to the case. So I want to
position and arrange this switch MP3 file
so that it matches. And now let's just bring up the audio preview by
using the shortcut comma. Also remember that here you have your preview where you can
readjust the shortcuts. But basically the comma will be your normal shortcut if you just want to
play your audio. But of course, also
you could just rearrange those
different shortcuts to, for example, only include
your audio in preview. But for now let's hit
calmer and listen. Should be okay, like we
have arranged it right now. And the next thing we
wanna do is again, youth and meth, use a method
that you've already seen. So we just select our
poker file and then open up the tracker and decides
to track the camera. Now again, of course this will open up our 3D camera tracker, start the process right
now, it's initializing. And then I think we have more than 200 frames
to be analysed. So therefore, of course, I will make a shortcut
here and we'll see again when this
process is done. So the process has been finished and you are of
course already familiar with all these different
points that have been added to our preview area, or better set inside the
3D camera tracker effect. So you could go ahead and just grab three of those points. Right-click and for example, create a solid and the camera. The very same way as we've done when we placed the
text in the landscape. But in this case, we don't necessarily
need to create a solid. So all we need is just
our camera analysis and therefore we just go ahead and hit the Create
camera button here. So what this will do is just add one more layer here inside our composition with all the analyzed data
inside this camera. And now we can go ahead grab our project
files and maybe start with the 50-year-old bill and just add this
to our composition, make it a 3D layer. And then you're already notice that this
bill will be moving with the rotation and general movement of the
camera inside the scene. So all we need to do now is just create a lot of
duplications of this €50. And then also add the one hundred and two hundred
euro bills and duplicate them some more times to just
create this dynamic effect. And what's very important for the effect to work
and to look nice at the end is that we will add different builds in
different positions. So of course again, those bills here have three positional data, X, Y, and Z. And what's most important for
the effects to look good at the end is that we have different z values
so that all in all, when moving this
camera are birds were sort of overlap and create this very nice
three-dimensional effect. So let's just go ahead and
start with this €50 bill. Then move it and bring it
back to the background. So just again, use your Shift button to make
this work a little faster. And you could also just grab
your bill position at here. And then what we
also want to open beside the positional data
or the rotational data. So therefore Shift R
to bring those up. And then maybe we
bring it in little x, rotation and rotation in z. Maybe move it over a little
bit more to the right side. Let's get back to the beginning, see where this bill will be. Move it over a little
more to the right side, and also move back
a little more in z. So this might be where we
want to place our first bill. And then we'll just go
ahead at another one. Again, make it a 3D layer. You could just add
another bill or duplicate your Fresco and
change the position doesn't really
matter in this case, we can bring up the
position and rotation data. And then for this one, we want to place it
in the foreground. Maybe just like here, and then in the center at the bottom, maybe like here. And you'll notice
that it will really start to make this one
appear three-dimensional. If we have several births
in different positions, maybe bring this one
up a little more. And that's just basically what we need to do
in the first place. And then later on, we're also going to animate different bills and sort of add another
effect and also adds the one bill that
was flying from the right side to the left side. But for now I'm going
to close this video as our first part and the next part I'm going to add
some more bills.
57. Practical example: levitating objects in real 3D space - Part 2: Sometimes I'm not done. So edit some more
bills to our scene. And next I'd like to show you
two different effects that you might want to
use in order to further animate our bank birds. Now, let's just demonstrate with this €50 bill here
in the foreground. And then of course,
you are free to choose whatever bills do you like to create your very own animation. So for now, I'll just select
this layer here and then choose Effect Distort Warp. Now, this still looks
very unrealistic, but if we change
the website from AHRQ to maybe
something like wave. And then we also lower the
bent factor here to maybe 20. If we then start to animate
our Horizontal Distortion, then you'll see that a
nice little movement here will be added to our bill. So if you just set
some keyframes for the Horizontal Distortion, you create a nice
little animation here that you might want to use
for some of those bills here, flying around in space. And second, another
effect that I also used for the preview video was Effect distort CC page turn. Now what this will do is create this nice little roll-up
effect here for our bank bill. Now, right now it starts at
the bottom right corner, but let's just switch, switch that to the
top left corner. And then we have
another control here, which is the fold position. If we just choose this, change it maybe right to
the upper left corner. What you could then
do is just animate this full position in order to create this nice
little turn effect here. So this is just another
effect where you might want to use keyframes
in order to animate your bank
bills and really add up to the nice little dynamic
movement here of our scene. So those two effects, where the effects that I use for the preview that I created. And now what we wanna do is add another bank bill and let this bank birth fly
around in space. And also your sort of twirl
around and fly to the wind until the bill finally leaves here outside of our left frame. So therefore, let's just
take the 200 Euro bill here. Duplicate that bill Control D. And then we want to
bring this one up. And what we wanna do
with that bill now is to animate the position
as well as the rotation. And we want to also use a
nice little effect which will transform the two d bill
into a 3D cylinder. And then animate
and rotate along that cylinder that we just
created or added to this bill. So for now, let's
just take this layer here and create a
new precomposition. Hit layer, pre-compose. And we want to leave
all attributes in our poker table composition and just name this one,
maybe €200 cylinder. Hit. Okay, and now this
won't change anything. Our composition will
stick as a 3D layer. And if we now open
that composition, all we will find insight as just the €200 PNG file that we've just selected to
create this precomposition. Now with this layer, what we wanna do is as
the CC cylinder effect. Now we could either either just again select the
effect or we open up our effects and presets and directly search for the effect. Let's just give it a couple of seconds here to load
all those effects. And there we are. And now we might
search CC cylinder, which has an effect that you'll find in the
perspective category. And now we'll just add
that effect to our bill. Now what you'll notice
is that the bill will be folded in a way that is
sort of creates a cylinder. So therefore, a 2D
object will be moved in a way and folded new
way to create a 3D object. Therefore, we also see
this little symbol here beside the CC
cylinder effect. Now let's bring up
the position and rotation data so I can
show you a little better. Of course, you can move this
alarm in x as well as y. And for now let's just Increase the zed value so that you can see
the whole bill. And if I now rotate the bill, then you will see
that it's really been folded to sort of create
this cylinder here. Now, in my opinion, this is folded or
band too heavy. And therefore what we wanna do is if I just for now deactivate the
cylinder effect again. This effect here is been
applied to the layer, which is the 200 Euro bill. And asked the €200 is
filling the whole layer. And this layer is used
to create the cylinder. Therefore, the rotation or the bent factor that has
been taken into account. It's just too heavy
and the bill is sort of creating the
whole cylinder itself. Now what we wanna
do is we will take this 200 Euro bill PNG layer, delete the cylinder
effect for now. Again, create another
precomposition. So choose Layer, pre-compose. And now we want to move
all those attributes into a new composition
and name this 1€200. Let's say second layer. Hit. Okay? And then we want to open
this precomposition. So right now we have created
two different layers. We have the poker table
final composition on top, which includes the €200
cylinder composition. And this composition
again includes the €200.2 layer composition. So therefore, let's
open that one up. Here. We want to scale our bill down to maybe
something like this. And then we'll come back
to the €200 composition. And if we now again apply the CC cylinder
effect to this layer, then you'll see that
the whole layer will be taken into account
to create the cylinder. But the 200 Euro bill itself won't fill
up the whole layer. So therefore it will not bend in a way to create the
cylinder all by itself, but we have some more space. And it will look much
more realistic in terms of the effect
that we want to create. Now let's bring the
resolution up to maybe full. And then you can see that this is the effect that
we want to create. And now what we wanna do
is combine a rotation of this Euro bill together with
a rotation of our cylinder. So let's start by
again opening up this €200.2 layer composition. And now bring up the rotation. Animate this rotation. Set a keyframe at the beginning, then maybe switch to the end. And what we wanna do
is add a rotation for maybe 1.5 full tern. So therefore just
increase this value, let's say to one rotation
and maybe 186 degrees. So that's really
nothing spectacular, but the bill is just
rotating in a 2D fashion. Now, this 2D bill here is what we'd be applied to create the
CC cylinder effect, which transforms a 2D
layer into a 3D object. And not right now. All that is happening is that
the rotation will start to be appearing along the cylinder. And now we want to combine this rotation with rotation
of the cylinder itself. So therefore open the rotation of this CC cylinder effect. And now we might start and
choose all those rotation x, y, and z to be animated. And then we have our
first keyframe set. So hit U to see those keyframes. And then we maybe
want to move to the end and add some rotations
here of the cylinder. So maybe start and rotate in x. Then also maybe rotate
this one a little bit in y and also in z. And together with the
rotation of the bill itself, this will create a nice
little twirl effect of our 200 Euro bill that we then want to apply to our
final composition. Now, this is sort of a
little guessing game or trial and error till you make
this one look really good. And I've also tried out
for a couple of minutes. And I've just written down some values that are
now want to choose. So maybe we want to start with 160 degrees for the x rotation, 124 y, and 200 for
the zed value. Then come back to the end
and rotate in x for 250. Y will be 210, and these debt
rotation should be 60. That's okay. And now we've created a really realistic movement
for our 200 Euro bill, which is just flying
around in space. So this is just a combination of a two-dimensional rotation of this bill together with this
three-dimensional solid. Now that we've also
rotated in its dimensions. Now what we wanna do is just add this composition
to our poker table, and we've already done
so because this was the composition that
we just precomposed. So here it is. There you see it, but we scaled it down of course. So therefore, what we need to do is just open up the scale of this 200-year a cylinder
and scale this one back up to maybe 300 per cent. And you'll see that
the 200 Euro bill will start to be in place, but I need to fix
one more thing. And that is get rid of
the light options here. So we just want to turn up the ambiance to 100% and decrease all those
other values here, diffuse and specular,
roughness to 0. Then we won't have any
effects regarding our light. And I'll come back to the
poker table composition. And now you'll see that
here we have our bill, which now starts to rotate
and twirl here in space. And all we need to do now is
just animate the position. And that's what I continue with. After you will get a little
coffee, tea, or what? Water break, whatever you need. And then we'll see for the
final part of this video.
58. Practical example: levitating objects in real 3D space - Part 3: Alright, let's continue
and finally move our bill starting here
at the right side, then appearing to
our main scene, stay in a little
while before then disappearing here to the
left side of the setting. So therefore, of
course we want to bring up the position data, use the shortcut P. And then first of
all, I generally want to increase the Z value here so that we move the whole bill a little bit more
to the background. Should be fine like this. And now at the
beginning of course, we want to move the whole
bill here to the right size. So therefore, either just
increase the x value or take the whole composition and move it over here
to the right side. We don't see it anymore. And this position
we want to save by creating our first keyframe. So just hit the stopwatch
to save this position. Now next I want to check
how many seconds I will have before I close
this poker case here. And just before closing, we already want this bill to be disappeared here
on the left side. So first of all, what
I wanna do is get rid of this beginning timestamp
and reset this to 0. So either I have just already done so for you in the polka dot mp4 file that I pass over
in the course materials. Or if not, you could just do the very same
that I'll do now, which is open up the
composition settings and then use the sort code 000. Again, 0, hit. Okay, so then we
have a little bit of a better view towards where we are in our current position. So let's move forward. See where other close
this poker case and it will be the case
just about here. So we have maybe 3.5 to
four seconds till we want this bill to already
not be visible anymore. So therefore, at about
half of their time, maybe here, 1 second, 20 frames that we
want the bill to be solid in the middle
of our image. And then just before
I close the case, maybe here or there, we want the bill
to be disappearing here to the left
side of our image. So maybe just move
the second one. And do that one. We only
want the keyframe to move. So move it over just
about to the middle of the time between finally disappearing
and starting to appear. And now we'll see that
for the whole animation, we only have about
3.5 or four seconds. So therefore, what I want to
do is adjust the cylinder as well as second
layer composition in terms of the animation
that we created, which was just created
for about eight seconds. So therefore we remove all
those keyframes over to maybe the 5 second
mark to just be sure, but we want it to
be a little faster. So therefore will
adjust those keyframes. And the very same
we will do here for the rotation of the bill itself. So just move over this
keyframe to the 5 second mark. And now we can come back
to our poker table. Final composition will see that the bill will
start to appear here, then fly to the inside. Before then leaving our image, our main scene to the left side. And then I'll start to
close the PAGA case. Now, the great thing about this animation in
terms of the position, is that we can treat this
one sort of as a mask path. And therefore what I can do is I'll take this point here of the position animation and create a little more dynamic
movement for our bill. Maybe let go here so that
the bill will start, move a little upward, then fly a little bit downward, and then we'll take this point and continue with the animation. There may be finished
with this final position, a little bit more
here to the top. So this looks like a very
nice parabolic movement. And that's what we
want to check out now. So we just go through
this animation, or Bill starts to appear, moves a little bit upward and also rotates along the cylinder, which creates this nice
three-dimensional windy effect. And then we have our bill
flying through the whole scene, finally disappearing
to the left side. So that's it for
the main animation. And now of course, what we also want to fix is that finally, we want all those bills to
fly into the poker case. And again, I think the
most efficient way is that we're taking a look
at it for one built in detail before then speeding up the whole process because it
will be the very same for all those different
builds until we arrive with the final animation. But before studying
and doing so, what I wanna do is change one more thing
for the bill that is flying through the scene from the right side
to the left side, which was this 200
Euro bill here. Select this layer one more time. And what I wanna do is I want
to change those keyframes, select them and right-click
Keyframe Assistant and change them to be easy ease. What this will do is just add
a little more dynamic and not move from one keyframe to
the other in a linear way, but just add a little more dynamic to the whole animation. So that's it for this movement. And now let's continue as planned and let one bill of
fly into our poker case. Now, in general,
I differentiated between builds on the left
side of our PAGA case and builds here on the
right side because all those bills on the
right side basically was just one simple movement
which is to let them fly inside of the case y for all those bits
here on the left side, what I did was first of all, those bills flew over here to the right side before
then from there on continuing the flight until they arrive
here inside the case. So therefore, let's just maybe take it from the left side, maybe this 200 Euro bill here. And again, of course
we want to open up the position data, use the shortcut P.
And if you like, you could also
animate the rotation. So therefore use Shift R to maybe also bring
up the rotation. Now, let's see where we
want the whole animation, the whole flight to be finished. So maybe here. This is a good
point where we want all those bills to already
be inside the poker case. So from this point on, Let's move backwards
a couple of frames. And here maybe is a good point in
time where we want the whole animation to start. So therefore, let's
save our position and rotation data at this point
and then move forward. Some frames, maybe
two bars here, and fly over, or just move
it to the right side. Also change the
zed value a little bit so that the whole
bed will move a little more to the background so that it really fits
the PAGA case here. And as already said, you can also change
the rotation, maybe off the z value here, to about this position. And then let's move forward some more frames to
this position here. And then again increase
the zed value. Again maybe change
also the rotation. Move over this bill to the
inside of our poker case. Now, as you'll see already, we cannot leave it like this. But what I also
added was a mask. And therefore, with
the layer selected. Yet, just use the
pen tool and draw a rough mask here
to fit the case. Just like this. Then of course again, open or a mask options
and animate the path, move backward one frame. And here we want to change
the path and just enlarge it year in those points so that we can still see the whole
bill at this point in time. All those points before,
of course as well. Now let's see here. This is where we'll be
halfway to the case. And then one more frame forward. What we wanna do is just let this layer n. So therefore use Control Shift D to split the
layer here at this point and then delete the
first of those. So that's the animation. We have the bill starting here. On the right side. As you can see here. Then what this bill will do, it will fly over
to the right side and from their own
move inside the case. As to make this animation
look even better and a little more unclear here
in the areas of the poker, k is what we also want to add
is the motion blur effect. So just activate it. And you'll see here,
from this point on, the bill will start to move over and sort of disappear
inside the poker case. Maybe you want to play around with the timing here
of those keyframes. Maybe add some more time here, make it a little bit slower. So therefore, grab those
keyframes, move them over. It's your decision where you
want the animation to start. But this is basically how it
works and that's the very same what I copied for all
those different bills. Move them over here
to the right side. Also increased the
zed value until then finally disappearing
inside this poker case. So basically that's
it for this tutorial. I continue to do the very same for all those
different builds. And then we'll see again
for the final animation, I finished the process for
all those different builds. As you can see here at
this point in time, normal bills are still visible. While if I move backwards
a couple of frames. Here, we still have all the
different builds in place. And then of course,
starting from the left side and continuing with all the other
bills on the right side, they seem to fly over to the poker case and
disappear inside that one. So basically that's
it for this video. But what I always like to do
at the end is just create a new adjustment layer and then apply some very basic
color correction. So choose Effect, color
correction curves. And then we just
want to increase the contrast just a little bit so that the scene will
look a little better. Now, this will be the
final animation that I render and then show to
you in just a second. So basically I decided to do this tutorial in a
very detailed way because in my opinion, it included some very
important contents. Now first of all,
you now know how to combine 2D and 3D layers. And for example,
make the CC cylinder effect work in a way
that we want it to be. And also what you've seen
is that we can animate the position of the keyframes the same way as a mask path. So that's it for this tutorial. In the next one, we're
going to have a lot of fun and create our very
own car accident. That also will be the last practical example
of this course. But before we start
with that one, Let's just see the final
animation we just created.
59. Introduction: Now welcome to the
very last part, huge project of this Adobe
After Effects course. Before I'm going to explain
to you what will be included and created
in this example. Let's again start by having
a look at the final result. That's it, I'm gone. Now, this also serves
as my application to all the international soaps
that will be shown in TV. So if you want to contact me, feel free to do so. But let's compare this final
video to our original file, where there's really just a car going from the left
to the right side. And you can already notice that there's a lot coming up to us that we want to include
in this project example. So let's have a look
at some more details here in the moment
of the accident. So first of all, we want to artificially damage
our hood of the car. Then also what will be
included, of course, are here the brake lights, as well as the skid marks
here behind our car. Also, we want to add some
smoke or fork here in the front area of our car
where the hit really appears. And as well, there
will be smoke behind the car because of course
the car is breaking. We have to pay attention
to the shadow of myself. And also there will be
glass shatters here coming out of the
front area of the car. So all in all a, really, a lot to do and a lot to be considered in this
project example. So let's waste no more time. You can either just again grep the course material of myself
running across the road. Or maybe you might record
yourself then of course, pay attention so that you won't
cause any real accidents. And yet either way, let's again see for the next video and get
started in After Effects.
60. Understanding time remapping: So here we are back
in After Effects, and now let's go ahead and start recreating our own car accident. So therefore, I've already imported the different sources. First of all, we have
to car crash audio file and then of
course the car video, as well as me as a person
running across the street. Now there's one more video
inside the course materials, which is the car brake MP4 file. And this technically only
is the end result of what we are going to
create in this video. Still have decided to cover
this inside the course. What we're going to
do in this video, because in my opinion, it includes some very
important contents about another method to
rearrange time. Therefore, we want
to go ahead take our car video and drag it
into a new composition. Now basically, you
have already seen that this is just the car riding from the left side through the scene until then leaving here
on the right side. And if this is not your very
worst enemy driving the car, then you would imagine that if the car gets involved
into an accident, it will at least start a break-in somewhere
here inside the scene. And this is what we want
to do in this video. And we want to start with
this because if we want to rearrange the time later on
when this layer, for example, is already combined with me
running across the street, then it will get very difficult
to rearrange the time. We want to start with
this and make this car a break here inside
our main scene. So you already know one
method to rearrange time, which is right-click time, and then open up
these time stretch. So what you could, for example, do is come back to the
moment this car arrives. So maybe about here, and then split the
layer at this point. So use Control Shift
D to split the layer. And then for the upper one, right-click time, Time, Stretch, and maybe use a factor of 110 per cent to slow the
car down just a little bit. Then move forward some frames
to, for example, here, split the layer again
Control Shift D, and again open up
the time stretch, increase the fracture,
make it 120 per cent, and so on until maybe
the car leaves here on the right side with a
factor of 150 per cent. So this would be
one way a method of introducing intervals
to slow down our car. But in this case we want
to do something different. So therefore, I'll delete
those layers again and direct the car file
back into our composition. And what we want to use is
the so-called time remapping. And to introduce it, you'll just right-click again time and enable time remapping. Now you can already see that two keyframes have been edit. And now let's think about important moments here of this composition where we
need our time to be remapped. So first of all, before the car is introduced
into the scene, this is basically just a still, so therefore, the time it
doesn't really matter. And the same applies here to the end where the car has
already left the scene. So therefore, let's set one more keyframe here when
the car starts to arrive. So therefore, we want to
hit this button to add another keyframe and then move forward until the car has left, which is here and there we
want to set one more keyframe. So let's start remapping
the time and we want to do so with the head
of the graph editor. Open up the Graph Editor
with this button here. Now if this is the view
that you will get, then you want to change this
view to the speed graph. So therefore, click this
button here to open up the drop-down and then change
it to Edit Speed Graph. Now what we wanna do is rearrange our relevant
key frames in a way that we will introduce
a break effect for our car. So remember the second
keyframe here defines the moment in time where the current gets
introduced to the scene. While the third keyframe defines the moment where the
car has left the scene. So what we wanna do is take this third key frame and just
move it to the right side. Now, you're already noticed that at the current cursor position, the car gets back into our
main scene because of course, between the second,
third keyframe, we have introduced
some more time. And now as this is the graph, what you can see here
is on the x-axis, we have the time, and on the y-axis we have the
speed or the velocity. So of course, S
between our first and our second keyframe has
nothing has changed. The velocity will still be one. While between the second
and the third key frame. As we have introduced some
more time, of course, the velocity has been lowered. To rebalance this. And as the time
between the third and the fourth key
frame has been lowered. Therefore, of course,
in this segment, the velocity is above one, so the video will
replay it faster. So that all in all at
the fourth keyframe, we still are at the very
same moment in time. So right now, this break moment
would be very unrealistic because we start going with velocity one and then have
an abrupt break moment, which then stays the same
as 0 comma 71 seconds. Per second and time. So what we want to
do now of course, is make it more realistic. But first of all, I
want to introduce some more time to
this composition. So therefore Composition,
composition Settings, and then maybe make
it 1 second longer. So six seconds hit, Okay? And this is just so that I can grab my fourth
here and switch it over to the right
so that we have sort of a constant velocity of one here at the
end of our segment. Which to be honest, doesn't
really matter because behind or after our
third keyframe, we don't even see
the car anymore. But what we wanna do now
is improve the segment between the second and
the third keyframe. So therefore, let's just
take this point here and move it over to the other point. So what this will
do now is start breaking in a very hard way. So the velocity will be lowered heavier than later
on when breaking. And this of course, is
what happens in reality. At first, we lose
velocity very fast, well then smoothing out,
still losing velocity. So it's of course still falling, but not as hard, not as intense as at the
beginning of our break moment. So this sort of
looks realistic and this is how we want to
rearrange our time. And now we can just
rearrange our work area. Maybe move this point here
so that it's close to one. Even though it won't really
matter as it's sort of a stent still image, but still, let's rearrange the
work area to like this and enlarge this one
more time to check again. So we have our car moving
here on the left side in the normal velocity
and then it will start to break here at this moment
where the car is introduced. At first the velocity will
be lowered quite heavy. While then the velocity
gets lowered even more, but not as hard as of course at the beginning when the car is trying to break and
avoid the accident. So let's finally check that this video in comparison
to the original file. So I'll just drag the original file into
our scene one more time, close to the graph editor. And what I wanna do is open
up the opacity, make it 50%. And now let's see what will happen for the just
created effect. So at first, the car will
be introduced for both, for both layers in the same way. But then the original car will start to be faster, of course, because it stays in a constant velocity and
then leaves the image before the car that we just created with
this break effect, which will get slower the more it will move from the
left side to the right side. So what I wanna do now
is rendered this video. And then we continue
and move along with the newly created
car brake video. So what you can do is just take this video and with this one, we'll continue in
the next segment.
61. Basic coordination of layers: So I have just ran out the time, remapped car video and
named it car brake. And what I wanna do next is delete the original
car video that we just remapped and therefore
import the car brake video. Now, if you did So for
yourself and you are now not using the car brake video
from the course materials. Then what you want to make
sure is that you will also once again import the
original car video, then activate the audio
source for that file and use the video source for the newly rendered
car brake video. And this of course, is
because we have moved the third keyframe to create some more time
break in this car. And therefore, of
course, the audio in that time frame will
be a little off. So therefore, just make sure to use the audio from
the original file. But to be honest, you won't really
notice that later on, as we'll also add the
car crash MP3 file. And therefore it won't
be really noticeable. But just to make sure that
we have a good audio, we will combine the car break
with our original video. And now we will do the same for the person and therefore
also take that one, create a new composition
so that now we have the car composition and
the person composition. And now let's go
ahead and create another new composition
and name this one. For example, a creche. Makes sure the preset
will be the same as the person and the car video. And for duration, let's
take ten seconds. This should clearly be
enough and then hit Okay, to create this composition. Now first of all, we want
to adjust the person and the car composition inside this newly created
crash composition. So therefore, grip the
person and the car. And let's bring down the
opacity of our person to 50%. And then we want to
move forward and see that we get those
two layers adjusted. So this doesn't look too bad, but the person should be halfway across the road
when the car really hit. So therefore, we need to
bring in a little more time. So just take the car composition
and move it a little bit so that when the crash starts to happen,
maybe a little more. Then the person will really be halfway across the road and
directly in front of the car. So this should be
fine like this. Next thing we want
to do, of course, is also at the car
crash MP3 file. So take that file, edits
to our composition. Double-click the L button
to bring up the waveform. And then we have
some break sound here at the beginning
of this file. And then this impact
here should really where the excellent
starts to happen. So at this point in time, we want to adjust the car crash. So therefore grab the file here, move it over so that it
really fits to the situation. And as the car composition
will really be the main fire. So this will be the
background that we will see all the time from
this car composition. While here in the
person composition, we will cut out our person. So therefore, let's
adjust the end of this composition to the end
of our car composition. Therefore, open that 11 more time and you'll
see that here, the original current video ends. So this will be the
end of the audio. So let's just create the end for the car wreck
video there as well. So just move over the work area, right-click and choose
trim comp to work area. Now, going back to the
crash composition, you'll see that the car
composition has been adjusted. So what we wanna
do is also grep, the end of our work area here to the end of this car composition. And now let's play
the whole phi, the whole setting one
more time to see if the audio and video really
fits the situation. So just use your shortcut
0 to create this preview. Alright, looking good so far. And also the sound seems
to be well adjusted. So before we will
finish this video, let me just mention
one more time what I already talked about in one
of the previous videos. And this is Tibet and not be dependent on changing
circumstances. And here, although the
person video has been taken maybe only 50 minutes after
affirmed the car video, you can already
clearly notice that the shadow of this
lantern has changed. And this will make
it a little more difficult for us to
adjust those layers. But as we need to cut
out the person anyways, we will work our way through to a final nice end result of this car crash that
we want to create. So that's what we're going to start with in the next video. Cut out to me as a person
and therefore see you in the next 11 quick
addition before we then really start to cut
out the person here. And this of course, is
that we also want to lower the audio levels of the car composition when the crash here finally
starts to happen. So therefore bring
up the audio levels by using the shortcut L. And then in the
moment of the crash, we want to set one
keyframe here. So just use the stopwatch, create the first keyframe. Move forward, maybe
a couple of frames, lower the audio to minus 35. And then let's play
this whole setting one more time by using
the shortcut comma. And maybe here at the
end we want to bring in some audio back in place. So therefore, just change
this to minus 20 maybe here. So that'll start from minus 35 and then come back
in place a little bit so that we can hear the car driving again here at the
end, just a little bit. And now let's play
this one more time. Alright, this sounds fine. And now, as I already mentioned, let's finish this video and
start cutting the person.
62. Cutting out a person: Let's go ahead and start to focus on the person
in our composition. Now, although effort, like my acting performance
was absolutely amazing, I would still suggest
that we will change the video to a frozen image, maybe at about this
point in time. Now to use a frozen image
has some advantages out of which one is that we can use
the so-called puppet tool. Of course, I'll show to
you that tool later on. And secondly, my leg is quite high in the
air here at this point. And this will be a point where I would already be on the hood. And I felt like it's a little unrealistic if the leg would go so high in the air
at that point in time. Now of course, feel
free to create a better version of this
video for yourself. If you are way better
actor than you might use the video and not consider changing to a standstill image. But as the car is still moving quite fast and also that will be smoke edit here and hear
me will be on the hood. So all will happen quite fast. And therefore, you won't
really notice if we use a standstill image or
stick with the video. So what we wanna
do is double-click the person composition to open it and then move
forward a little bit. And maybe this
frame here is fine. So what we wanna do is cut
the layer Control Shift D and then right-click the upper
layer time freeze frame. Next we want to go ahead and use a tool that you already
know to cut off the person. And this of course, is
the Roto Brush Tool. So therefore,
double-click this layer here to open up the layer view and then
select the Roto Brush Tool. And let's start to
select the person. Now at first, when the
car is not in place, to be honest, it
wouldn't really matter if you just cut out a
little bit too much. Like for example, the
tree here beside myself, because of course
this exact tree is also part of the layer
below the person. But still, as this first frame will be the reference frame, I want to make sure
that we will do a perfect cut of the person as this frame
will be the reference. And then of course, when
the car comes into place, it gets important that we really only consider myself here and not part of the sidewalk or parts of the tree
here around myself. So just give me a couple
of seconds to find the perfect Katia and then
I'll be back and we continue. So I adjusted the
Roto Brush Tool to follow me along in time. And notice that, for example, in this frame, parts of the
sidewalk are still in place. But as already mentioned, this doesn't matter
at this point because the very same sidewalk is also part of the car composition. And what I also not focused on, worse, the shadow that will
be part of the next segments. So for this one, it was
just important to cut out the person here
for this layer. And of course also
cut out the person in the frozen frame here
in the upper layer. So that's it for this video. And now let's continue
with the next one.
63. Null object and advanced expressions: So I use this button to
freeze the relevant frame. So therefore, back to
the composition view. You'll see that here when
the image is frozen, of course I'm asked
myself and before, when I was still move in and running across the
street, of course. We also use the Roto Brush Tool to take a mask around myself. Now let's get back
to the creche, the final composition here. And then maybe bring back
the opacity to 100%. And you'll see that here. I'm introduced to
the main scene, which now of course is
the car composition. Until at this moment, where should have been hit. I will still stick
in that position. And that's what we want
to change in this video. We want to make sure
that I'm sort of sticking to the
position of the car. We don't need to worry about the shadow of myself
at this moment. We will do so later
on, but for now, let's just focus on the
position of myself here along the crash so that I will really move out to
the right side. Now one way to do this, the most intuitive way is to just open up the position as
well as rotation data again. And then maybe create
the first keyframe. At this moment here. Stopwatches. Then move forward a couple of frames to maybe
this position here. Move the person composition
over to the hood of the car. Also bring in some
rotation here. Maybe like this. And then makes sure that all
those frames in-between, I'm still on the hood here to make it look like
a realistic accident. As already mentioned, this will be the most
intuitive method, but right now I want to cement some knowledge from the course. And we once again want to introduce a so-called
null object to save the positional data off the car so that
we can use it. First of all, for me
here on the hood. And secondly, we might also
use that data later on to, for example, animate the
brake light here of our cars. So therefore, let's once again delete all
those keyframes. And what we wanna do now is
create a new null object. So layer new null object. And we want to save the position data of the car
inside this null object. I've already said
that you normally use a null object,
store inflammation. So in this case, the
information that we want to store is the
position of the car. So therefore, we will just
take the null object and maybe take this part
of the car here, the mirror, and adjust the
null object to that position. Now open up the position
of that null object. Create the first keyframe. And let's first of
all move forward. Here we can still see the mirror also adjust the null object. Move forward a little more until the mirror
will be out of the image. So we still want to
take the null object until it has left
the main image. So here, and here we have a little speculation should be about
here, the mirror. Okay, Let's move backwards. Here. We can still see it. Alright, backward
one more frame. Now let's check the
frames in-between. Because of course the car is
no longer linearly moving in the same velocity because we introduced the break effects. So therefore, it might
be that we need to adjust the null
object in-between. And now this should be
fine for our purposes. Now what we want to do
is link the position of this null object to the
position of the person. So what we can do is just open the position
data from the person. We can already see it here. And now let's take the
pick whip tool here and just link it to the
position of the null object. Now, this will work
here at the end, whether the exit N
has already happened. So I sort of stick to
the position of the car. But of course, in
those moments before the accident where I supposed to only cross the street here, we already stick to the position of the
car and therefore, of course, this is not
what we want to achieve. So we need to make sure that in all those moments
before the accident, maybe until this moment here, we don't want to stick
the person to the car. Well, of course here at the end, we want to stick the position of the car to the position
of the person. What we might do is again, just split the layer here, Control Shift D,
and then only link the second one to the position of the null
object from this moment on. And before we only want the
person to cross the road. But I want to show
you another method that works with the use of expressions in order to finally link the person in a way
that we wanted to be. And this is a little more
advanced way to use expressions because what we want to
introduce now is a condition. And I think it's a good point in this course to
introduce conditions, to add expression because
it might be very useful for you to use conditions
in many other projects. So therefore, let's
just try and add an expression with a condition in order to position myself. So first of all, the
position of myself should be dependent on the exposition
of this null object. And if the x position of this null object is still
here on the left side, then we don't want
to change anything for the position of the person. But if we reach a certain
point in terms of the x value, then we want to stick
the person to the car. So that's what we're
going to add now. And therefore, first of all, we want to split the dimensions
of the position data. So you can do so by
right-clicking the position data here and then choose
Separate Dimensions. Now what this will
do, of course, is just split the dimensions so that it'll be a
little easier to, for example, separately change the x position of
the null object. So first of all, we want
to do the very same for the position of the
person composition. So just right-click again and
choose Separate Dimensions. Now, let's begin by
linking the x position of the person to the
exposition of the null object. So again, just
choose to pick whip, tool and a link
those two values. And if we then want to see the expression that
has just been added, we'll see that here
for the X position, it just states, link it to the exposition of the
null object layer. Now let's save this part of the statements here
in a variable. So maybe we just want
to name it x position, x underscore position equals the x position of the
null object layer. Also add a semicolon. And now in the next slide, we want to introduce a condition
to this statement here. So let's just write IF
open up the brackets, then open up curly brackets, else and again curly brackets. So we begin with this
part here where we want to write the condition
of this statement here. And we want to link
the x position of the person composition to the exposition of the
null object in a way that if the car is
here on the left side. So if the x position of the null object is
still very small, then we don't want the person
to be linked to the car, but we want to stick to the position of the
original composition. And if the value reaches
a certain amount, then we want to link it, linked the person to the
position of the car. So therefore, we can use the x position of
the null object. So let's say if the exposition is larger
than, for example, 726 or the current
moment in time, then we want the person
to be linked to the car. So we want the exposition
to be x position, which is the value
of the null object. And if the value is
below or equal to 726, Then we want the person
to stick with value, which is just the variable, to stick with the original value of any expression that you
are currently working in. So let's just close
this expression. And what you'll see is that
here at the beginning, the person is just
running across the street anomaly in
the original position. And if then the position
of the x value which is linked to mirror here, I mean the exposition
of the null object. If this one reaches
a certain amount, then the x position
of the person will also stick to the position of the mirror because it'll be the position of the object. So of course, this still
doesn't look perfect. But it was just a way for you to get to know condition
because I really think it can be very useful
to use expressions and conditions in many, many
different projects. So what we might do is
change this value here, maybe switch it to 800, and only then start linking the position to the position
of the null object. So that it'll look
a little better. But still of course, we
need to further improve this and separately link the position as well
as the rotation from our person to really
make this look perfect. Now, doing so, we have a little problem because
we can no longer adjust the exposition as
this has already been linked to the position
of the null object. So let me just state, state one more time that the easiest way to link the
position and make this look realistic is that you won't
use any expressions in this case by just open up the position
as well as rotation. And use some keyframes to adjust the position to the
hood of the car. But still, I wanted you to see how you can use
conditions inside statements. And now what we
want to do is add another way to further
adjust the position. So therefore, we want
to add an effect, and this effect will be
Effect distort transform. Now what this will do is
bring up some more data, like for example, position
and also rotation. And now here again, we can fix the position
without having to modify the exposition
here inside the original position data
off the person composition. So therefore, let's just
hear creates some keyframes, like for example, at this moment for the position
and the rotation. And then move forward and make
this look really perfect. So here we want the person to move a little to the right side
and rotate to the hood. So right now you cannot grab
the image because what this will do is change the
original x and y position. But of course we want them to be changed inside this effect. Therefore, let's adjust that
inside this effect here. This looks good. While don't worry about the arm
as well as the leg. Again, we will use a mask to
make it look as if the leg is behind the car or on the car or we need to
worry about right now, is just the rotation
and position so that really fits to the hood. So again, all you need to
do is just move forward and adjust separately
for all those frames so that it'll look perfect. And that's what I
will do right now. And then we'll see again
in the next video.
64. Masking and alpha matte: So I added a couple of more keyframes to our
Transform effect, animated the position
and rotation datasets. So that it starts to
appear as if I really get hit by the car and get thrown out of the main scene to the right side along
with the vehicle. Now, before we further
enhance this effect by introducing a mask
to the hood of the car. Let me quickly show you
the puppet tool that I already mentioned in
one of the last videos. So you might want to select
the person composition here, and then just choose
this button here, the Puppet Position Pin Tool, which technically
is only an effect. So you can also
choose Effect puppet. And we might start by adding some Puppet points
to, for example, the hat, the back, left, and right
side of the person. And now you can really
take those points to bend myself over and
create this nice effect. Now this effect itself
is really cool to see. I'm a great dancer also, but it doesn't look quite good when applied
to moving images. So in this case, as we want, apply it to a video. You will notice
that for example, if a bank myself over like this, move forward some frames. Then here my leg gets
disconnected from the body. And later on also the hat will be disconnected
from the body. So all in all, it doesn't
really look that good. So therefore, we want
to delete the effect here and then open the
person composition. And if we now apply the effect
to our upper layer here, which if you remember, is just a frozen frame, then you can see that
if we apply it again, maybe create four points. If we bend over myself
here like this, then this will really be
carried along in time. And in this way
maybe you want to improve the moment where the car really
hits me to sort of create this heavy band effect. Because the car really
hits me here in the bag. Then you might want to add this puppet effect and further
enhance your own image. But for now, I just wanted
to show you the effects that you already know
how to use this one, for example, wanting to create a nice puppet in
your own project. But in this case, we will
delete the effect again and start adding a mask
to our crash video. And now the method that
you already know are the easiest method that
you might consider now is just again, select your person
composition and then choose the Pen tool and
start drawing a mask here around the hood that
you then want to subtract. Now, in this scenario, there are two reasons
why this is not the most effective way to just add a mask to this person
composition layer. Nonetheless, I will start and do so and then
quickly explain to you why other methods in this case should work
a little better. So for now, let's
just start and draw a rough shape around the
hood of the car like this. Then subtract this mask. And you can already notice that the mask doesn't really have
the effect we want it to be, or at least the position of the mask is not
where we want it to be. And this is because we have
applied the Transform effect. So if I turn off this
effect for 1 second, then you'll see that originally this has been my position. And as I'm completely outside of this mask and then moved
with this transform effect. This is why you will still
see the parts of myself here, even though they are inside of the mask and should
have been subtracted. So technically, the position of myself
is just about here. I'm completely outside
of this mask and therefore I am not subtracted. Then moved over to
the right side, and therefore, you can
still fully see me here. Now, this is the
reason number one. And the second reason is
that we want to also use the information from
our null object following the car again. So therefore, we will delete the mask inside the person
composition at this point. So just select the
mask and delete it. And now we want to
add a new layer. So Layer, New Solid. Maybe name this
one, Put, choose. Okay, and first of all, make the layer visible. Now what we wanna do
with this layer here is create a mask and follow
the hood of the car. So also turn invisible, the person layer for
a second so that we can clearly see
the hood of the car. And now with the
hood layer selected, we want to start and draw a mask here along with
the hood of the car. Maybe like this. Then again, open the mask
options, subtract this mask. And what we want to do now, we want this layout to be an Alpha layer of our
person composition layer. So therefore, choose this
person composition layer, open up the track matte here, and choose Alpha Matte hood. Now what this will do if we activate the person layer again, you'll see that now we really subtract this
mask area here. As already mentioned,
this hood layer now is an alpha layer of our
person composition. Now for this layer here, we want to use the
information from the null object which
will follow our car. So what we want to do therefore, is parented to the null object. So open up the parent column
here and then select null. And now you can see
that this mask will move along to the car. Not perfect. So we
need to adjust it, but it will follow along
with the null object. Now, you can also see the
difference of parenting a layer and really Lincoln a layer with
the pick whip tool. So if we open up the position
data of this hood layer and we would then pick whip the position to the position
of the null object, then the position
would be the same. But if we parent it
than any change to the position will also be
applied to this layer. So if I move to the
right, for example, to 50 pixels, then this would layer will also
move for 50 pixels. And therefore in this case,
we want to parent it. Choose the perfect
hood in this case, and then follow along in time. And now what we need to do, again, also adjusted to
make it look perfect. So it's basically fine. It will move along with the car as this null object
here follows our mirror. But still, we need to do
some better adjustments and create some keyframes. So for this hood layer again, what we want to do is open up the mask and animate
our mask path. So I worked my way through the relevant keyframes and
animated the mask path. As you can see here. What I also did
was first of all, I move down the whole
mask in general just a little bit to not fully
cover the whole hood, but maybe start at
about half the height of the hood so that it looks a little more
realistic as if I'm relying on the car. And also add a mask feather of ten pixels to just make those border areas look
a little smoother. Now, if you move
backwards in time. And as this hood layer here, first of all follows the position of the
null object layer. And also this layer works as an Alpha layer to the
person composition layer. Therefore, what you
can see is that here at the beginning
of the main scene, the person will
start to disappear. And this is because
the whole layer gets moved to the left
side along with the car. And as this layer is an alpha layer to the
person, of course, therefore, the person
will start to disappear. Now, what we can do to
bring back the person is just increase the width
of this hood layer. But before we can
start to do so, we first of all need
to cut the mask because of course we
don't want any changes applied to the width
of the whole layer to also be applied to our mask. So therefore just cut
the mask, Control X, then open the layer
solid settings of the hood layer and change the width maybe to 5
thousand, just to be sure. Hit Okay, and you'll see that as the layer
has been widened, our person is back in place and now we can also
bring back the mask. So Control V with the layer selected and our mask
is back in place. So that's it right now, I'm really satisfied with
how this turned out. So we have animated
the position and rotation of the
person and also edit a mask to the hood here so that all in all
it really looks quite realistic as if I
get thrown out of the scene to the right side and really involved
into an accident. Of course, feel free to
add your own effects. Maybe also add a puppet. Or if you have filmed yourself, just bend over a little more, play around with the rotation
and position until it turns out with the result that
you want to continue with. Now there's one more
thing I want to add in this video and that is to apply the motion blur effect to the
person composition a layer. Therefore, let's just select that layer then move
forward a couple of frames to maybe
at about here. And now we want to activate
the motion blur effect. If you cannot see this effect, then just toggle switches until you can see the
motion blur effect. So we want to
activate that effect. And you can see that motion
blur has been applied. But it's easy to see that it has been applied way too much. So we want to change that by opening the
composition settings. Then click on this
Advanced tab here. And there you'll find the
motion blur settings. So for now we want to
lower the shutter angle to maybe at about 20 degrees. And you'll see that motion
blur is still active, but way less, which
all in all makes it look way more realistic. It, okay, and that's
it for this video. I'm really satisfied with
how this turned out. So we have animated the position as well as
rotation of the person. Also, we add a mask to the hood of the car
so that all in all, it really looks as if I get involved into the
accident and then thrown out of the
main scene here to the right side
along with the car. What we wanna do next is
of course make it look even more realistic by
bringing back the shadow. And then also later on, we will animate the
glare of the car. And for example, also add
smoke to the hood of the car. But as already
mentioned next in line, we want to bring
back the shadow and therefore see you
in the next video.
65. Shadow of the person: So in this part, we want to re-introduce
the shadow of our person to the main scene. So therefore, let's
start and take the person composition out of the project files and
just duplicate it. So use the shortcut Control
D. And then we want to rename the second
one to shadow. Now, let's first of all
open that composition and delete the Roto Brush effects that we applied for the person. So that right now we
really are back with the main scene with
the person and the shadow that we
now want to use into the crash composition. So let's just take the
shadow composition and let go below the person. Now first of all, what
you want to make sure is that before the crash
starts to happen, the effect here, the
Transform effect, you want to make sure that
the position and rotation is set to its original
value so that therefore, if we activate and
deactivate the shadow layer, the person would
really be still in the same place right
before the accident. So if you didn't do so, then just set a keyframe to
the moment before the exit. And so that really the
Transform options will be set to the original values. You can just use the
reset button for that. Now let's go ahead and start
working with the shadow. So first of all, we
just want to draw a mask and make sure
that the mask here will not include the shadow of the Lantern as that has
changed during the sun. So we really only want the shadow of the person to be included sort of like this. Then you can already see that right now everything
is back in place. So we have the person here, we have the shadow
of the person. So this basically is just the
mask from the shadow layer. And here on the left side we can see the car composition so that the vehicle is also included in the final crash composition. Now, let's adjust the shadow
of the person a little bit better because if we move
forward a couple of frames, what you'll notice is that because I cut the
shadow of the lantern, that also the shadow here of my left foot no longer appears. And this is because if I deactivate the mask of the shadow composition
for a second, you'll notice that
originally the shadow of the lantern has been
here in that layer, and therefore, I cut the mask
right below the lantern. So therefore, the shadow of the foot is no
longer included. So we want to adjust
that a little bit. And therefore, just animate the path of this layer
here, the mask path. So here everything seems fine. So we want to set
the first keyframe. Then let's move
forward one frame and adjusted just
a little bit here. Include the leg and also
the shadow of the foot. Now, it doesn't
have to be perfect because later on all this
will happen so fast. But still we want to include the shadow of the food so that it appears quite realistic. Make the best out of it. Maybe if you film
yourself without any shadows that you won't
have these problems, but doesn't really
matter because this is the main thing you want
to learn in this course, which is to just find a solution for every problem
you'll have and just solve it so that
it'll look quite nice at the end and that's
what we are going to do. So therefore, we want to make the shadow
as best as possible. Here we want the arm to
be included as well. And let's do so for a
couple of more frames. Maybe like this. And then we want to
activate our mask again. So switch it to add. And you can already
notice that the car is already hitting us. And we also of course now need to re-introduce
the shadow of the car. And therefore, we want
to now add an effect to the shadow composition
layer that will cut out the brighter
areas of this layer. So that here the shadow, so the layer below the shadow composition
layer to be back in place. So with the shadow
layer selected, we want to choose
Effect, keying, extract. And if we now play around with the white point setting
here and lower this value, then you'll see that
the lower we get, the more of the
bright areas will be cut out of this
composition layer. And we can already see that
the shadow of the car, so the layer below this shallow layer to
come back in place. So maybe let's lower
the value to about 50. And then what you
can see is that for all the moments
before the accidents, we have the person,
we have the car, and we have both shadows
in our main scene. So all we need to do
now is just enhance. Those moments, we are
both shadows intersect. So here what you can see
is that first of all, we have a very small border here around the shadow of the person. And we wanna get rid of
that bottle, of course. And therefore again, with
the shadow layer selected, we want to choose Effect
met simple choker. Now, what this effect
will do is you can enlarge or shrink your mask. So if we just lower this value, you'll see that we want
to enlarge the mask. And if we just
increase the value, then we will shrink
the mask a little bit. And maybe a value of
about two is enough. Maybe let's say three, so that we can really see both
shadows here intersected. And now what we
wanna do is we want to take this moment in time, this moment here, and cut the shadow layer
at this moment. So again, use Control
Shift D to cut the layer. And for the upper shadow layer, we want to make this
one a frozen image. So right-click time, freeze-frame,
you already know that. And now we can use the mask here and just deactivate the
animation of the mask path. Because all we will use is
just this one mask because of course we have a frozen
image and this shadow layer. Now we want to
again, first of all, linked to the null
object so that it will move along with the car. And then later on we want
to individually enhance the position and
rotation data of this one to make it look
a little more realistic. So basically it's
all the same that we also did for the person. So therefore, first of all, link it to the null object. And then open up the
position and rotation data. He made those and let's see
how it looks over time. So this frame seems to be fine. We have added the choker to just cut the mask a
little bit so that it really looks as if both
those shadows play together. And then let's move
forward one frame. And we already see
here it's organized. So let's set a key-frame there. Then move forward one more frame and just grab the shadow layer. Move it over so that it
perfectly intersects the car. Move forward one more frame. Let's see looking good. This is also looking good. And maybe we said one
more key frame here. Move forward and then move
it over just a little bit. Here we want to get a
little lower. But all in. All right, now this
is looking fine. So here the shadow is
changing a little bit, although the car seemingly
is not really moving. So therefore, we have set a
keyframe for this one here, move forward one frame, and just apply it a
little more to the left. And you're also a little
more to the left so that it will fit the
movement of the car. Now there's one more
thing you can notice, and that is here at the bottom. There are a little
bit on some parts of this plant here included because the plan seems
to be quite dark. So what we wanna do is again, open up our mask path
that we have d Animated. So it's just this one
mask that we have. And we can just shrink this mask to only include the shadow and not affect here those
plans area here where the darker areas might
also still be included. So that's it. You can see me arrive in here. The shadow is still in place. And then the car
starts to appear, of course, also with the shadow. Then I get hurt and the
shadow starts to move along the car till I leave
the image on the right side. So all in all, this was a
little more complicated. As already mentioned,
if you'd like to film yourself from a position
where there's no shadows. Of course, your life
will be a little easier. But this course is all about learning how to solve problems. And therefore, I wanted to
make it a little difficult. Although I didn't really, I didn't really know
that the shadow of the lantern will
change so fast, but still, we have
managed and find a way to make this look nice. So what we wanna do next is add some more effects to make
it look even better. And we want to begin with adding skid marks and animate
the brake light. So therefore, see you
in the next video.
66. Brake light and wheel traces: We want to continue
improving the main scene. And in this video we will
add the brake light, and then later on also the skid marks behind our
car for the brake light. Let's go ahead and first of all, create a new solid. And then let's name this
one the brake light. Make it read as
already selected, and also make sure that it's
come size or if you like, you can also make it smaller, but come size should be OK, hit OK. Then first of all, we want to deactivate
the view of this layer. Now with the layer selected, Let's just draw a rough mask around the brake light
year of the car. So choose the Pen tool and start drawing this rough
mask doesn't have to be perfect for our purposes. So like this, it should
already be fine. Then activate the
layer again and you can already see that we have applied the red solid
here to the brake light, but of course, it's
the looking very unrealistic and
therefore we want to improve it in two
different ways. First of all, let's open
up the mask settings. So use your shortcut M, M. And then we want to introduce a feather
off maybe about, let's say 25 pixels
so that it would start to look a little better integrated into the
surroundings of the car. Let's see. After and before we
applied the red solid, already looking quite good. But we also want to
add a glow effect. So choose Effect, stylize glow. And let's increase the radius
a lot to maybe about 90. And then we want to lower
the intensity to maybe 0.75. So this should be fine. And that's what we did. You can see this
is after we have integrated the brake
light layer and before. So all in all, it's
really looking like this car is a break-in
to prevent the accident, which unfortunately
doesn't succeed. But still of course, we want to introduce this brake light. Now, all we need to do is just animate the position of
this brake light over time. So first of all, you
already know that we link it to the position of the layer that will of course follow our
mirror off the car. So just choose the
parenting layer to the null object layer. And then you can see that the layer sort of already
follows our light. But again, we need to
individually follow the position. So of course, open up the
position a data one more time. Creates some keyframes
and then just use your arrows on the keyboard
to adjust this layer. So that will really
follow the car over time. And that's what I will do. And when I'm finished doing so, I'll be back and we continue
with the skid marks. So I adjusted the
brake light layer, added a couple of
more keyframes. And what I also did
was I already included the skid marks layers here
into the final composition. Now let me just quickly
show you what I did to create those skid marks. So first of all, I created
a new composition. And for the width, I chose 2400 pixels, so I made it a little wider. And 1200 pixels in height that are named
Edwin skid marks. And then I added a white and a black solid via
the white solid is only there so that you
can see a little better what I did inside
this composition. So I just added a
black solid and then applied some masks
or select the solid, choose the rectangle tool, and then draw a
rectangle like this. Take that rectangle,
Control D to duplicate it. Move down with your arrow keys. Do that a couple of times, maybe four or five times, to create this skid mark. That's what I used for now. I'll delete the fifth six months again and also deactivate
the white solid. Then we can just
take this skid marks composition and import it
to our crash composition. So I did this two times, one time for the right wheel and one time for the left wheel. Now of course, this is a 3D layer that
needs to be rotated. So what I did was I rotate it basically mainly here
in the x-axis and then just a little bit in the z axis because it doesn't really move from the left
to the right side, but it's also moving a little
bit from top to bottom. So this is the
three degrees here, but mainly you need to rotate
in terms of the x value. What I also did was if
I open up the scale, I unlocked the three-dimensions, just lower the scale
for the y value. Then I applied to masks
on this skid marks layer. So first of all, the
layer is covering the whole scene from the
left side to the right side. And then we have two masks. So the first mask, basically it's only
following the wheel of the vehicle so
that the skid mark will really end here
right before the wheel. So this year is the first mask widened
here to the left side. So that if we continue
moving to the right side, we can still see the
whole skid mark. And here on the right side, as already mentioned, We'll
stop right before the wheel. So this again is
animated over time. So the mask path has been animated to just follow
the wheel of the car. And then I added a second mask, which is this one here. And this basically is only
feathering the skid mark. So what I did was if I
open up the mask settings, you can see I
applied a feather of 400 pixels so that
the skid mark, we're sort of fade out here on the left side and also here on the right side where maybe the car has stopped breaking, or at least it won't produce
any more skid marks. So this mask is only moving just a little bit from the
left side to the right side. And together with
the first mass, creating this effect
of the skid mark. And then of course, I just
duplicated that layer to create the same skid
mark for the left wheel. I lowered the scale for the
y-value even more to 60%. And then I adjusted those
two masks just a little bit. But basically you can just reuse them to create the skid
mark for the left wheel. And that's it. I think it's easy to
recreate that for you to sort of create
those skid marks. And what we wanna do next
is add some glass shatters. Therefore, see you
in the next one.
67. Pieces of Glass via CC Particle World: So let's go ahead and
create the broken bits of glass that sort of fly out of the windshield of the vehicle. And therefore, we want to use a very powerful effect that
really allows you to create different three-dimensional
objects that you might want to use for your very own
purposes and projects. But before we can
apply the effect, we first of all need
to create a new layer. So choose Layer, New Solid. And we want to name
this one glass, make it come size and the color of the layer
doesn't really matter. So just hit Okay. To create this layer
with the layer selected, we want to apply the effect. So choose Effect simulation
CC Particle World. Now this effects, together with the symbol
here, first of all, shows that you can apply it to a two-dimensional layer to create a
three-dimensional object. You already know this from
the CC cylinder effects that we applied in
some previous project. So here are a lot of different
categories and settings. And right now I'm going
to explain to you the most important ones
so that you can really use this effect for your very
own projects and purposes. Let's maybe begin with
the particle category. So first of all, you can change the particle
type and general. So here you can see
that we've created a particle world with lines, but you can also, for example, create bubbles, cubes,
or very often used, creates a particle type
system with faded spheres. So this will really create a nice three-dimensional
space here. And then you can of course,
change the color of the birth as well as death
moments of those particles. Before we will do so, let's first of all change
the type to a tri polygon. This would be the type
that we will use later on to create our glasses. Now, let's continue. And first of all, let me mention that of
course the particles have a moment of birth as
well as a moment of death. And the time in between can be changed by the longevity
of your particles. So in this case, those particles
will live for 1 second, but you can, of course,
let them live shorter. So then you'll see some
less particles here. And if you increase the time, you will see more
and more particles here inside our system. And then of course you
have the birth rate, which determines how
many particles will start to live in certain
moments of time. So if you increase
the birth rate, then of course, more
and more particles will come into place. And let's continue with
the category producer. There of course, you can
change where those particles are born and where those
particles will live over time. So if we want to
change the exposition, then you'll see that
particle system basically moves to the
right or left side. If we change the y position, of course, easy to
guess what will happen. They will change in their Y position if we
change in the zed value than the whole particle system will move in, it's that excess. So let's just bring
those values back to 0. And now what we wanna do is
continue with the physics. And there again, you have different settings so
you can of course change the speed of your particles by moving this velocity value. You can also inherit
the velocity. This is something
that we will add in just a couple of seconds. You can also change the
gravity of the particles, as well as decide on
how they should react when arriving to the floor
of the particle system. This will also be changed in
just a couple of seconds, but for now let's
just one more time. Move back to the
particle category. And what we want to do now to recreate those glass
pieces is first of all, change the birth
and death color. Now in this case, we
don't want to make any differences between
birth and death colors, so just choose a color that
will represent the glass. So make it sort of this
light blue color here. Choose Okay, and apply
a very similar color here in the moment of death. Should be okay. And what we want to do next is changed the birth
and death size. Again, we don't want to
differentiate between birth and death size because broken piece of glass will stay a
broken piece of glass. Therefore, we'll just
lower the value in general to maybe about 0.025. So we lowered by
a factor of ten. And then we create those nice little
broken pieces of glass. And now what we want to do
next is we need to make sure that the glass will
move along with the car. And secondly, basically there's
only one moment where we want the glass to be produced and that is the moment where the
accident happened or where I fly here and
hit the windshield. So therefore, let's play with the birth rate as well as
the producer position. So first of all, let's see
where the accident happens. So we need to move backward. And maybe this year is a good moment where we want
the particles to be produced. So therefore, let's move
backward one frame. Hit the stopwatch here and
lower the birth rate to 0. And then we want to move
forward just one frame. And then increase the
birth rate to 20. Move forward one more frame. And again, choose the
birth rate to be 0. So what this will do
is you can already notice the glasses just start to be produced in
this very moment where I sold off,
hit the windshield. And now next what we
need to do, of course, is make those glasses here
move along with the vehicle. So therefore, first of all, we want to change the
producer position. So let's again move backwards in time to maybe about here, set our first keyframe for the x position
of the producer. And then move forward
a couple of frames, maybe to about here, and increase the exposition. So move over the producer
to the right side. You'll see that the
glass shatters will start to move a little
bit to the right side. But in order to really adapt the movement of the producer, what we need to do is increase the inherit
velocity percentage. So we want to increase that
value to maybe about 8085. Sort of like this. So now those pieces
of glass will really move along
with the vehicle. Maybe we want to decrease the movement of
the producer just a little bit like this, so that the glass will
really start to move out off the windshield here in the
moment of accident and then fall over to the street. Now there's one more
thing we want to add, and that is how to react
when arrive into the floor. So in this case, the floor
should be the sidewalk. So the floor that we
can see here inside the particle system effect is already correctly positioned, but what we want to do
is change the reaction. And therefore we'll open the
floor category here inside the physics and change the floor action from
none to balance. So what happens now is
that those glass shadows here arriving at the floor
really bounced back. Leg rear glass shatters
here inside the main scene. So that's it for this
glass shatter effect. But one more thing
we want to add, and that is to apply a motion
blur to the moving glass. And in this case,
we're gonna do so by applying an effect. And this effect, you can find
if you just choose Effect, time, CC, Force, Motion Blur. You can see that right now, the glossier looks a lot more realistic
because really flying out off the main scene here to the floor and then bouncing
back from the sidewalk. So maybe play around with those settings here inside
the CC Particle word effect, as already mentioned,
this is a very, very powerful effect
that you might want to use in many, many
different projects. But for our purposes, I'm satisfied with
how this turned out. We have some glass shatters
added to the scene. We also added the brake light. We added the skid marks
here behind our car. And now next, we want to consider adding
smoke here coming out of the hood as well as some more smoky or behind the
car because of course, we are heavily breaking.
68. Smoke via Fractal Noise: We continue and in this
video we want to add the smoke to the hood
area of the car and then also use that smoke layer to
create some more smoke here behind the car because
of course we want to support that this
car is breaking. So again, we start by creating a new Solid name,
this one, smoke. Make it concise
and choose, Okay? And now again, to create
the element that we desire, we want to do so by
applying an effect. And in this case, it will be effect noise and
grain fractal noise. Now here again, you have a
very different fractal types. So you could create turbulent noises as
well as dynamic noises, swirly noises, or even strings. So just if you have
some special desires, but in this case, we'll stick with the
basic Fractal type. Then what we want
to change is lower the contrast to make it
a little more foggy. Maybe like this. And now to create a
dynamic smoke effect, what we will do is animate
the evolution wheel. So if I just change this value, you'll see that we sort of get some movement
inside this effect. And if we then apply a mask to this effect and move this
over with our vehicle, then we are basically
already set and have created
the smoke effect. So let's go ahead, lower the value
again to 0 degrees. And we're going to hit the
stopwatch here for this 1. First of all, also
turned down our layout. Then I will add a
mask to this layer. Let's move backward
a couple of frames, maybe to about here. Then start adding a mask. So move over until you
find the Ellipse tool. And let's just do a
rough mask like this. And what we will do to
adjust the amount of smoke is lower or increase
our mask expansion. So we also want to animate
the mask expansion. And what we want to animate is the general position
of our layers. So therefore open up p
for the position as well. And if we now use
the shortcut you to open up all those
different effects that we apply it and want to animate all the effects with
the activated stopwatches. Then you'll see that
here we are with the mask expansion,
the evolution. We'll end the position that
we now want to animate. So this is our starting point. Let's bring back the
view of this layer. And first of all,
what I want to do is generally lower the opacity. So that's what I forgot to
open up t for the opacity, lower that to maybe
let's say 44%. And then again, you bring back all those keyframes effects. And then we might start
and first of all, lower the mask expansion
in this point here. Also open up some
more mask options, increase the feather
and general to maybe about 90 pixels. And then let's move forward
a couple of frames, maybe about here and there
we want to first of all, let the fork or
the smoke appears so increase the mask expansion. Then of course we will move the whole mask to
the right side. So just increase the x value for the position of that layer. And let's again move forward some more frames to about here. Increase the exposition again to follow along with the vehicle. And what we also want to do is increase and turn our evolution. We'll hear. So maybe just add a spin
for about 1.5 turns. Just make the whole effect
a little more dynamic and create the very
own movement here inside the fractal noise effect. So there we are. No smoke
at this point until the year smoke starts to appear and we move over
to the right side. Maybe what we can
do is at this point increase the mask
expansion a little more. So therefore, just increase this value so that the
smoke will start to disconnect from the hood and attract more of
the surrounding. And I currently notice that also the brake
light at this point is not at its best positions. So just for a second, I want to activate
the breakdown layer. Use my arrows to move this
one over to the left side. Because of course, this also
should be well adjusted. But now back to the smoke. And there you can
see, first of all, the smoke is very
concentrated here on the hood area
and then starts to disconnect a little bit and
create this nice effect. Now again, of course you might even improve this a
little more for yourself, maybe rotate a little more. Inside the evolution, we'll apply some
more settings here. Create maybe a better
mask how you like. But what I did was just
take this layer again, duplicate it, and then move
it over to the left side. Now first of all, open all those keyframes points
again, delete the keyframes. And then maybe I want to delete the mask and general create
a very new mask here. The first mask was
something like this. Of course again, I added
a huge feather here. Also lower the opacity even more to maybe
thirty-five percent. And here for the
area behind the car, what I did was I
combined several masks. So again, you might follow
around for the vehicle here, and then maybe just take that layer again,
duplicate it again. Delete the mask,
create one more mask. In this area here. Play around with
the feather again. Maybe lower the general opacity
even more to 25 per cent. And this is how I created some more smoke here
behind the car. I think because this
is nothing really new. You have seen how
to create smoke and general with the
fractal noise effect. So what I will do, I will
further improve this now here for the
area behind the car. And then I'll skip
this part and we see again in the next
and final part, which is to create a damage or damage to the hood
of our vehicles. So therefore it see you
again in the next video.
69. Adding damage to the hood: Alright, final video
of this section, final video of this
practical example. And what we want to
add in this video is a damage to the
heart of our car. Now first of all,
we want to take the car composition
and duplicate it and rename the second
one, maybe damage. And then we want to import
this composition and place it right above
the car layer. So it will be the new
position number 13. And then we want to adjust
it in time so that it really fits the car composition. So just move forward a
couple of frames here, like this, and now it should
really fit the car layer. Let's move backward
a couple of frame until the very
moment of this hit, which maybe is about here. And now we want to open the damage composition
in this moment. And then we will draw a mask around the hood
of this car here. So just select our car break, which is the video material
of this composition. And then start drawing
a mask around the hood. Remember, if you leave your
left mouse button pressed, you can adjust and make it
a little more curvy here. And should be fine like this for our purposes than just take this point
and move it over here. And then we have the
hood of the car. And what we want to do now with this hood is first of all, freeze this moment in time. So again, right-click
and choose freeze frame. Also we can delete the
car layer and general, because for this composition
we don't need any audio. This is just the damage that
we will add to the hood. And now what we want to do for this moment where we
have frozen the hood, we want to apply
an effect to then create this damage
here to the hood. Before doing so, let's quickly
introduce another layer, new solid, and just
make it dark gray. Because before we
will bend the hood, we also want to have
a replication of this hood in terms
of this gray layer here laying behind the hood. What I mean by that,
I'll show you when I just duplicate this
car break layer again. And then for this
dark gray solid, we want to choose it to be Track Matte as an Alpha matte for the
car brake MP4 files. So therefore, what you can see is if I just turn off
this car break layer, then you'll see that
behind that layer we have one more replication of that layer to sort of
recreate our hood. Because right now we want to
bend this car break here, but still we want to have a little replication of
that hood lay behind it. So I want to make it
a little darker even. Maybe like something like this. Choose, Okay? And then
for the upper layer, you want to choose
an effect which has Effect distort CC Split. Now here you can set
to attacking points, point a and point B and then
apply the split effect. Now, if we choose
the point a to B in the left bottom corner and the point B in the
right bottom corner. Then we can increase the
split amount and you'll see that the hood will start
to bend to the top. And behind with this
dark gray solid, we still have one
more replication of the hood here at
the very bottom. So let's maybe adjust the point a little
better because we have a very small part of the hood still staying
here on the downside. So maybe move this one
over a little more. And this should do the job. Now what we want
to do is animate the split amount when the
accident really happened. So at first of course, we have a normal hood and
then when the car hits me, we want to maybe take
three or four frames and just increase the split
amount to add about 20 or so. So let's again move back to the crash composition and see where we want
the effect to start. So maybe this is a
good starting point. So back to our
damage composition. Then we want to animate
the split amount. Start with the value 0. Move forward, let's say four frames to three
seconds and eight frames and increase the split
to maybe 19 or 20. And then back to our
crush composition. You can see that the effect
has been placed here. But of course, what we
need to do is again, follow our car in time. Now in general, again, of course we can link
this to the null object. But we need to individually adjust just like we did
before with the person, the smoke, or with the
null object in general. So therefore, we will open up the position data and then move backwards a little
bit until this point. And let's start
animating the position. So move over this one to this position so that
it really matches our car. And let's move
forward and adjust the hood where we all start. Move over forward
some more frames, deactivate our personal
layer just for a second so that I can
see a little better. And then I want to take the damage composition
and move this one over to the right side. And let's see in the
times in between, adjusted just a
little better here. Then we have added a nice
little damage to the hood. Now, by the way, I
have to say sorry because what I did was when I created the damage
for the sorts I needed to replace myself, also unmute myself a little bit more upward because
of course we have now a little more space here
because the whole Hood has been bent over a little
more to the top. So therefore, you
might want to change the position of the person
for yourself afterwards. Or just start by adding
the damage to the hood and then apply the position
for the person. So for now I will just add some more keyframes here so
that the hood really fits. And then I think we have
added a very cool effect and I'll be back when I
added those other keyframes. So again, I added a couple
of more key frames. And now let's move backward to the moment just before the
accident which is here. And at this moment we want
to split our damaged layers. So use Control Shift
D to split the layer and then just delete those
moments before the accident. Because of course there we
don't need the damaged hood layer to be active.
And that's it. We have applied a nice
damage to our hood to sort of reflect the impacts
created by this accident. And then the car will move out of the main scene to
the right side along with myself with all those
broken legs and arms that this
accident has cost. Now basically, that's
it for the accident. And let's have a
look at what we've created so far in this project. So in my opinion, this is looking quite nice, although I know it
took us more than an hour of projects material
here inside this course. But I decided to do it with a lot of details
because in my opinion, it included some very important, some very nice effects
like for example, the CC Particle
word that you can definitely use in a lot
of different projects. Also, you now know a method
how to easily create smoke. You have seen the split effect. So all in all, I think this example was very useful
and maybe you use it for yourself to try to
surprise your parents that you got involved in your very
own excellent or whatever. Now one more thing
I always do at the end of the project,
you already know it. And it's to create a new
adjustment layer and apply an effect which normally will be the color correction
curves effect. And let's just quickly
increase the contrast. And maybe in this case, make it sort of an autumn scene. So just lower our blue channel a little bit and maybe also
lower the green channel. So that it'll look
a little bit like a nice autumn scene with
sort of an accident, which of course is
not nice about. Now let's play the final result, what we have created
in this project. Alright, so one more
time, what did we do? We have added a damage
to the hood of the car. We have animated
the brake light. We have also added skid
marks here behind the car. We also added glass shadow to make it look even
more realistic. Then of course, we
moved the person over to fly out of the scene
along with the car. We needed to care
about the shadow here. So it was really a very intense, but I think quite nice project
and I hope you liked it. And learn some more things about the great program that
is Adobe After Effects. Now that's it. This was the last project example
and we'll continue in the next video
and I'll show you some more extensions
and other grades. Who will that make
it even greater to work with Adobe After Effects.
70. All-inclusive package Envato Elements and Transition extension in After Effects: At the end of this video course, I'd like to give you some
personal recommendations that I feel can
really one more time improve your work
inside of After Effects and bring your projects
to the next level. Now, the first recommendation
you can already see here, and that is the website
elements dot and Barto.com, all the subscription to the
Envato Elements program. Now, this website really offers an all-round data
pool in terms of, for example, video templates
for After Effects, but also for other programs. You can download, stock a
video as well as photos. You might want to use
music or sound effects. Or you could even
consider improving your PowerPoint presentations with different
presentation templates. Now, the great thing about this website is
that first of all, it doesn't stand still, but it is added
up with thousands of new elements day
in and day out. And of course, all
those elements are licensed so that you can
use them, for example, to create your YouTube
videos and fill those videos with a
cool music track. Now, the most
interesting section for this video course might be the video templates
for After Effects. So let's just bring this up. And you'll see that we have tons of different elements here. Like for example, a
YouTube channel kit, which will include different
subscription buttons and intro and outro and
many other elements ready to use for you inside of After Effects and then
create a YouTube video. Or you could use such
a vintage titles pack with a lot of different
elements that all by themselves look
really, really cool. And of course, you can use
the search bar if you have any special project you want
to create and for example, needs something like
a heads-up display than just search for that. And you'll see that
we have a lot of different elements even here
for this heads up display. Like for example, those dashboard
infographics here with a lot of bright elements, or here we have different
heads up display screens. And this was the case for
anything I needed in the past. I just use the search
bar and anything I need. It could be downloaded directly
here on Envato elements, not just for the
video templates, but maybe also a stock
video that adds up to a YouTube video
I wanted to create. And of course, I also mentioned
the PowerPoint templates. So here you can download different templates to
improve your presentations. Or you could choose
from a variety of different music tracks. Right now, as you can see, there are 126 thousand
royalty-free audio tracks available on this platform, which all can be filtered
by different categories, such as the genre or the
mood of those tracks, as well as, for
example, the tempo. Or if you want to fit
to a certain video, you could go ahead and filter
for length of those tracks. Now, you can even download
fonts to improve your videos. So all in all, Envato Elements really isn't
all-inclusive platform, and I can only recommend
it to you one more time. Now, let's talk about pricing
of the subscription year. And first of all, I want
to make sure that I'm in no way sponsored. I
will get nothing. If you decide to open
up a subscription, there won't be any
affiliate link. It's just a personal
recommendation as I myself am a really convinced user
of Envato elements. So the price will be €14.50 per month if you decide
to pay on a yearly basis. And I think it's
double the price. So €29 if you want to make the payment
month, month by month. Also, before opening
up a subscription, you could start with a
seven day free trial and just check out
this platform. And there's also another
benefit if you're a student. So then you will get another
30% off to those prices. So Envato Elements, really a personal recommendation for me. And next in line I have another
recommendation which is an extension that I'm often using inside of After Effects. And the funny thing
is that I've found this extension here
on Envato elements, but I think I'd better
show this extension to you directly inside
of After Effects. And the extension
I'm talking about is the so-called premium
build-out transition spec. So once installed you'll find it if you click on a window, extensions, premium
build-out transitions peg. And the really great thing about the premium builder
in my opinion, is that it's very handy and well-integrated to work inside
of Adobe After Effects. Now, this premium
Builder does not only come with the extension
of the transition spec, but there are also
many others legs, for example, a titles
sequence package, or also a YouTube channel package with this
premium, a builder. But you have to imagine that normally if you
download, for example, a video template directly
from Envato elements, then those elements will come with an After
Effects project file. And inside those projects, you'll have one
final composition. And inside that composition, you will see all those
different types of sequences in different
compositions. So you have to navigate through those compositions
in time to see what effects and what titles can be achieved and how they will
finally look in After Effects. It's a little different here
for this premium builder, because if you
just open this up, click on that premium billed
at transitions peg here. You'll see that it's
directly placed inside of after effects
without the need to navigate through different
compositions but directly visible what effects
can be achieved here? If I go back to the
final structure, you'll see here
that first of all, you can just drag, drop this transition
spec and place it anywhere you want to put it
inside of After Effects. And then here you have different folders with different categories
of transitions, like for example, blinds or
glitches, glasses, motions. So for example, let's open up the glitches and
you can directly see how one picture will
be faded into the other, in this case with
a glitch effect. And those effects can be very easily applied just
by double-clicking. And then those will open up in a different layer here
inside this composition, I used those transition effects. For example, in the preview
for the tracking video. Here you can see we have the text layer with integrated
texts into landscape, and then this layer will be warped into the drone shot here. And this just was achieved
by double-clicking inside a warped
transition so that this layer here was created. So basically, you can not only transition from one
picture to another, but also from one
composition to another, or just from anything
you'll place below this, on the left side of this
transition will be shifted to what you will place here on the right side of that
transition in time. So this is just another
recommendation from me. I use this very often to achieve easy and smart transitions. Also, those transitions
even come with sound. So I can only highly recommend using this
transitions pack as well as other extensions here with this premium builder, just search for that, for
example, on Envato elements. Now, I think we can finish this part with my
recommendations and for this course as you one more time and the
very last video.
71. Thank you: Now here we are. This is the very last
video of this course. Thank you first of all,
for participating. I really hope you
like this course could take away
something from it. And maybe now are just as fascinated by the great program, Adobe After Effects as I am. If you did like this course, then one more time it would be really happy and
extremely grateful if you'd give this one
a five-star rating and recommend it to your friends and family who
would also like to learn about Adobe After Effects. This course has been
more than one month of full-time work for me. So it will be a small
gesture for you, but yeah, a great and important
step for humanity if you just give this one
a positive rating. Thank you once again and now all the best to you
personally and a lot of fun and success in your upcoming After Effects projects. Bye bye.